WO2022134247A1 - 发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置 - Google Patents

发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022134247A1
WO2022134247A1 PCT/CN2021/072274 CN2021072274W WO2022134247A1 WO 2022134247 A1 WO2022134247 A1 WO 2022134247A1 CN 2021072274 W CN2021072274 W CN 2021072274W WO 2022134247 A1 WO2022134247 A1 WO 2022134247A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
time
domain
data block
unit
symbols
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/072274
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
余雅威
郭志恒
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN202180079413.1A priority Critical patent/CN116491194A/zh
Publication of WO2022134247A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022134247A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more particularly, to a method for transmitting and receiving data and a communication device.
  • the transmission capability of the terminal equipment such as: a small number of antennas, general baseband chip processing, limited uplink transmission power and other constraints.
  • Transmission the transmission performance of uplink transmission faces greater challenges. Especially in scenarios such as long-distance and deep fading, the uplink transmission performance of terminal equipment may deteriorate sharply.
  • the base station side has certain threshold requirements for the signal to noise ratio (SNR) of the received uplink signal, for example, it can be called the sensitivity of the receiver. Only when the SNR of the uplink signal received by the base station side is higher than the sensitivity, can the correct signal estimation and data demodulation be guaranteed.
  • SNR signal to noise ratio
  • the present application provides a method and a communication device for transmitting and receiving data, so as to improve the performance of repeated transmission.
  • a method for sending data is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a transmitting end device (eg, a terminal device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the transmitting end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: receiving indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is repeatedly sent N times on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1; at the first time in the N time domain units The data block is sent on the domain unit, wherein the first time domain unit satisfies the following conditions: the number of consecutive time domain symbols that can be used to transmit the data block on the first time domain unit is greater than or equal to L, and the starting position of the consecutive time domain symbols Not S, S represents the position of the initial time-domain symbol configured for one transmission of the data block; or, the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is less than L and greater than or equal to the first preset threshold; or, in the case that the time domain symbols available for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, the total number of time domain symbols available for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit is greater than or equal to L; or, when the time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on
  • the method may include: receiving indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is repeatedly sent N times in N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the data block is sent on the time-domain unit, the total number of time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is Q, and the first time-domain unit satisfies the following conditions: Q is greater than or equal to L, and the first time-domain unit
  • the starting position of the time domain symbols that can be used to transmit the data block on the unit is not S, and S represents the position of the starting time domain symbols configured for one transmission of the data block; or, the Q time domain symbols are consecutive, and Q is greater than or is equal to the first preset threshold, and Q is less than L; or, the Q time-domain symbols are discontinuous, Q is greater than or equal to the second preset threshold, and Q is less than L; wherein, L represents the configuration for one transmission of the data block The number of time domain symbols.
  • a method for receiving data is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a receiving end device (such as a network device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the receiving end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: sending indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is repeatedly sent N times on N time-domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1; at the first time in the N time-domain units The data block is received on the domain unit, and the first time domain unit satisfies the following conditions: the number of consecutive time domain symbols that can be used to transmit the data block on the first time domain unit is greater than or equal to L, and the starting position of the consecutive time domain symbols is not S, S represent the position of the initial time domain symbol configured for one transmission of the data block; a preset threshold; or, when the time domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, the total number of time domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit is greater than or equal to L; Alternatively, when the time domain symbols used for transmitting the data block on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, the total number of time domain symbols that can be used for transmitting the data block on the first time domain unit is
  • the method may include: sending indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is repeatedly sent N times in N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the data block is received on the time-domain unit, the total number of time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is Q, and the Q time-domain symbols on the first time-domain unit satisfy the following conditions: Q is greater than L or equal to L, and the starting position of the time domain symbol that can be used to transmit the data block on the first time domain unit is not S, and S represents the position of the starting time domain symbol configured for one transmission of the data block; Domain symbols are continuous, Q is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold, and Q is less than L; or, Q time-domain symbols are discontinuous, Q is greater than or equal to the second preset threshold, and Q is less than L; Wherein, L represents data The number of time-domain symbols configured for one transmission of the block.
  • any parameter or parameter range that can characterize the number of time-domain symbols corresponding to a data block can be used to determine whether to perform repeated transmission of the data block in a time-domain unit.
  • the code rate can be used to determine whether to perform a repeat transmission on the time domain unit.
  • the actual code rate used by the first time domain unit for transmitting the data block is less than or equal to the first preset code rate.
  • the actual code rate is determined by the configured transmission block size for one repeated transmission and the number of time-domain symbols actually available in the first time-domain unit.
  • the first preset code rate may be predefined, or may be indicated by a network device.
  • the first preset code rate may be a threshold value, or may be a range.
  • N repeated transmissions need to occupy N time domain units, and one repeated transmission is performed on each time domain unit.
  • the position of the time domain resources (eg, time domain symbols) occupied by the transmitting end device for repeated transmission on the time domain unit may not be exactly the same as the position of the configured time domain resources for one repeated transmission. For example, on some time-domain units, as long as the time-domain unit satisfies a certain condition, the time-domain unit can be used to perform a repeated transmission of a data block.
  • the transmitting end device can use the first time domain unit to perform repeated transmission once, and correspondingly, the receiving end device can receive the data block on the first time domain unit.
  • the repeated transmission scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application has more flexible requirements for the time domain unit used for repeated transmission, can be applied to more communication scenarios, can make full use of time domain resources, ensure the number of repeated transmissions as much as possible, and reduce the occurrence of The probability that the actual number of repeated transmissions is less than the configured number of repeated transmissions occurs, and the transmission performance is improved.
  • the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following: the data block occupied on the first time domain unit The time-domain symbols are discontinuous; the position of the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to S; the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to L ; wherein, S represents the position of the initial time domain symbol configured for one transmission of the data block.
  • the position of the time domain resources (such as time domain symbols) occupied by the transmitting end device for the repeated transmission on the time domain unit can be the same as the configured one-time repeated transmission.
  • the locations of the time domain resources are not exactly the same.
  • the transmission may be performed according to the configured time-domain symbol positions for one-time repeated transmission, for example, according to the configured S and L; on some time-domain units, according to the time-domain unit available for transmission
  • the time-domain symbol of the data block determines the time-domain symbol of the transmitted data block. Therefore, the utilization rate of resources can be improved.
  • the position of the starting time domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is: predefined, or indicated by a network device.
  • the information on the position of the starting time-domain symbol occupied by the data block in the first time-domain unit may be carried in high-layer signaling, or may be carried in downlink control information.
  • the position of the starting time domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is: the first time domain unit that can be used to transmit the data block.
  • a time domain symbol is: the first time domain unit that can be used to transmit the data block.
  • a method for sending data is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a transmitting end device (eg, a terminal device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the transmitting end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: receiving indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is repeatedly sent N times on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the first time domain in the N time domain units The data block is sent on the unit, and the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following: the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit are discontinuous; The position of the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to S; or, the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to L; where L is expressed as The number of time-domain symbols configured for one transmission of the data block, S represents the position of the initial time-domain symbol configured for one transmission of the data block.
  • N repeated transmissions need to occupy N time domain units, and one repeated transmission is performed on each time domain unit.
  • the position of the time domain resources (eg, time domain symbols) occupied by the transmitting end device for repeated transmission on the time domain unit may not be exactly the same as the position of the configured time domain resources for one repeated transmission.
  • the time-domain symbols occupied by the data block may be determined according to the specific conditions of the time-domain unit, and the time-domain symbols are not sent according to the configured time-domain symbol positions for repeated transmission. For example, it is not sent according to the configured S and/or not according to the configured L.
  • the time domain symbol occupied by the data block can be determined by referring to the position of the time domain symbol that can be used to transmit the data block.
  • the repeated transmission scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application has more flexible requirements for the time domain unit used for repeated transmission, can be applied to more communication scenarios, can ensure the number of repeated transmissions as much as possible, and reduce the occurrence that the actual number of repeated transmissions is less than the configured number of times. The probability of occurrence of repeated transmission times improves transmission performance.
  • the method further includes: when the first time domain unit satisfies the following conditions, determining to send the data block once on the first time domain unit: the first time domain unit The number of consecutive time domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the unit is greater than or equal to L; or, the number of consecutive time domain symbols that can be used to transmit two data blocks on the first time domain unit is less than L and greater than or equal to the first Setting a threshold; or, when the time domain symbols used for transmitting the data block on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, the total number of time domain symbols that can be used for transmitting the data block on the first time domain unit is greater than or equal to L; or , when the time-domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit are discontinuous, the total number of time-domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit is less than L and greater than or equal to the second Set a threshold.
  • any parameter or parameter range that can characterize the number of time-domain symbols corresponding to a data block can be used to determine whether to perform repeated transmission of the data block in a time-domain unit.
  • the code rate can be used to determine whether to perform a repeat transmission on the time domain unit.
  • the actual code rate used by the first time domain unit for transmitting the data block is less than or equal to the first preset code rate.
  • the method further includes: performing channel coding on the data block to obtain an encoded bit sequence; from the encoded bit sequence, selecting a first bit sequence, the first The bit sequence corresponds to L time domain symbols; sending a data block in N time domain units includes: sending a second bit sequence on the first time domain unit, and the time occupied by the second bit sequence on the first time domain unit The domain symbols are discontinuous, wherein the second bit sequence is a partial bit sequence in the first bit sequence.
  • the bit sequence mapped to the first time domain symbol is deleted to obtain a second bit sequence, and the first time domain symbol is the first bit sequence.
  • the first time-domain symbols may include one or more time-domain symbols.
  • the bit sequence carried on the unavailable time-domain symbols can be directly punctured and deleted, the implementation is simple, and only the data information on the available time-domain symbols (that is, the time-domain used for transmitting data blocks) can be The data information on the symbol) is encoded, which can maintain a better channel coding gain as much as possible.
  • the first time-domain unit includes W time-domain symbols, and the W time-domain symbols include a first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and a second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols, The first segment of continuous time-domain symbols and the second segment of continuous time-domain symbols are discontinuous, and W represents the first time-domain symbol that can be used to transmit a data block to the last time-domain symbol that can be used to transmit a data block on the first time-domain unit
  • the number of included time domain symbols; sending the data block on the first time domain unit includes: sending the data block and the first demodulation reference signal DMRS on the first continuous time domain symbol, and sending the data block and the first demodulation reference signal DMRS on the second continuous time domain
  • the data block and the second DMRS are sent on the symbol; wherein, the position of the first DMRS on the first continuous time domain symbol and the position of the second DMRS on the first continuous time domain symbol are determined according to W; or, the first The position of the DMRS
  • the position of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and the position of the DMRS on the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols can be jointly determined according to W; or, respectively, according to the number of the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols
  • the location of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols is determined, and the location of the DMRS on the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols is determined according to the number of the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols.
  • the DMRS configuration of each segment can be configured uniformly or in sections.
  • the position of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and the location of the DMRS on the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols can be jointly determined according to W, which is simple and feasible.
  • the position of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols may be determined according to the number of consecutive time-domain symbols in the first segment, and the second segment of continuous time-domain symbols may be determined according to the number of consecutive time-domain symbols in the second segment.
  • the position of the DMRS on the symbol is more flexible in this way.
  • the N time-domain units include M second time-domain units, the second time-domain units are time-domain units that do not send data blocks, and the data blocks are in N
  • the number of times of transmission in each time domain unit is (N-M), where M is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1 and less than N.
  • the data block is not sent on the second time-domain unit if the second time-domain unit satisfies the following condition: the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the second time-domain unit is less than or equal to the first a preset threshold; or, the total number of discontinuous time-domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the second time-domain unit is less than or equal to the second preset threshold.
  • the method further includes: sending the data block on at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units.
  • the data block is sent on at least one time domain unit after N time domain units until at least one time domain unit after N time domain units and N time domain units.
  • the total number of time-domain symbols of a data block sent on one time-domain unit reaches N*L.
  • the transmitting end device may perform additional repeated transmission in at least one subsequent time domain unit , until the actual total number of time-domain symbols of the repeated data block reaches N*L. Therefore, the number of time-domain symbols actually occupied when the data block is repeatedly transmitted can be guaranteed, and the transmission performance can be improved.
  • the data block is sent on at least one time domain unit after N time domain units until at least one time domain unit after N time domain units and N time domain units.
  • the sender device may perform additional repeated transmissions in at least one subsequent time domain unit until the actual number of repeated transmissions reaches the configured number of repeated transmissions until the number of times. Therefore, the number of repeated transmissions can be guaranteed, and the transmission performance can be improved.
  • the at least one time domain unit is M time domain units.
  • M times of repeated transmission may be performed in the form of repeating typeA on the M time-domain units.
  • the number of times of sending data blocks is less than or equal to M.
  • repeating type A it is described in detail below.
  • the number of time domain symbols occupied by the data block in at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units is M*L.
  • At least one time domain unit may perform repeated transmission in the form of repeated type B.
  • repeating type B when repeated transmission is performed on the time domain unit after N time domain units, the requirement for repeated type B in the existing protocol can be followed until the actual number of repeated transmissions reaches the configured number of repeated transmissions.
  • repeating type B it is described in detail below.
  • a method for receiving data is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a receiving end device (such as a network device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the receiving end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: sending indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is repeatedly sent N times on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the first time domain in the N time domain units The data block is received on the unit, and the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following: the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit are discontinuous; The position of the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to S; or, the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to L; where L is expressed as The number of time-domain symbols configured for one transmission of the data block, S represents the position of the initial time-domain symbol configured for one transmission of the data block.
  • the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmission of the data block on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L; or, the first time-domain unit available for transmission The number of consecutive time-domain symbols of the data block is less than L and greater than or equal to the first preset threshold; or, in the case that the time-domain symbols used for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit are discontinuous, the first time-domain unit The total number of time-domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L; or, when the time-domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit are discontinuous, the first time-domain unit can be used for transmission. The total number of time domain symbols of the data block is less than L and greater than or equal to the second preset threshold.
  • any parameter or parameter range that can characterize the number of time-domain symbols corresponding to a data block can be used to determine whether to perform repeated transmission of the data block in a time-domain unit.
  • the code rate can be used to determine whether to perform a repeat transmission on the time domain unit.
  • the actual code rate when the data block is transmitted on the first time domain unit is less than or equal to the first preset code rate.
  • the first time-domain unit includes W time-domain symbols
  • the W time-domain symbols include a first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and a second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols
  • the first segment of continuous time-domain symbols and the second segment of continuous time-domain symbols are discontinuous
  • W represents the first time-domain symbol that can be used to transmit a data block to the last time-domain symbol that can be used to transmit a data block on the first time-domain unit
  • receiving the data block on the first time domain unit includes: receiving the data block and the first demodulation reference signal DMRS on the first continuous time domain symbol, and receiving the data block and the first demodulation reference signal DMRS on the second continuous time domain
  • the data block and the second DMRS are received on the symbol; wherein, the position of the first DMRS on the first continuous time domain symbol and the position of the second DMRS on the first continuous time domain symbol are determined according to W; or, the first The position of the DMRS
  • the position of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and the position of the DMRS on the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols can be jointly determined according to W; or, respectively, according to the number of the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols
  • the location of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols is determined, and the location of the DMRS on the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols is determined according to the number of the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols.
  • the DMRS configuration of each segment can be configured uniformly or in sections.
  • the position of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and the location of the DMRS on the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols can be jointly determined according to W, which is simple and feasible.
  • the position of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols may be determined according to the number of consecutive time-domain symbols in the first segment, and the second segment of continuous time-domain symbols may be determined according to the number of consecutive time-domain symbols in the second segment.
  • the position of the DMRS on the symbol is more flexible in this way.
  • the N time-domain units include M second time-domain units, the second time-domain units are time-domain units that do not receive data blocks, and when the N time-domain units are The number of times a data block is received in the domain unit is (N-M), where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than N.
  • the data block is received on at least one time-domain unit subsequent to the N time-domain units.
  • the data block is received at at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units until at least the N time domain units and at least one after the N time domain units.
  • the total number of time-domain symbols of the received data block on one time-domain unit reaches N*L.
  • the data block is received at at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units until at least the N time domain units and at least one after the N time domain units.
  • the total number of times the data blocks are received in one time domain unit reaches N, or it is understood that the number of times the data blocks are received on at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units is M.
  • the at least one time domain unit is M time domain units.
  • M times of repeated transmission may be performed in the form of repeating typeA on the M time-domain units.
  • the number of times the data block is received is less than or equal to M.
  • the repeated transmission on the M time-domain units after the N time-domain units may be in the form of repeating typeA.
  • repeating type A it is described in detail below.
  • the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block in at least one time-domain unit after the N time-domain units is M*L.
  • At least one time domain unit may perform repeated transmission in the form of repeated type B.
  • repeating type B when repeated transmission is performed on the time domain unit after N time domain units, the requirement for repeated type B in the existing protocol can be followed until the actual number of repeated transmissions reaches the configured number of repeated transmissions.
  • repeating type B it is described in detail below.
  • a method for sending data is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a transmitting end device (eg, a terminal device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the transmitting end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: receiving indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that one data block is sent on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1; on a first time domain unit in the N time domain units Sending a data block, wherein the first time domain unit satisfies the following conditions: the number of consecutive time domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time domain unit is greater than or equal to L', and the starting position of the consecutive time domain symbols is not S'; or, the number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time-domain unit is less than L' and greater than or equal to a third preset threshold; or, the first time-domain unit can be used to transmit data blocks.
  • the total number of time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L'; or, the time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time-domain unit
  • the total number of time-domain symbols available for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit is less than L' and greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold; or, the first time-domain unit is used for transmitting data
  • the actual code rate of the block is less than or equal to the first preset code rate; wherein, L' represents the number of time domain symbols configured for data block transmission in one time domain unit, and S' represents the data block in a time domain The location of the starting time-domain symbol configured for transmission on the cell.
  • the method may include: receiving indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is to be sent on N time-domain units, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the first time-domain unit in the N time-domain units Send a data block on the first time domain unit, the total number of time domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time domain unit is Q, the first time domain unit satisfies the following conditions: Q is greater than L' or equal to L', and the first time domain unit The starting position of the time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit the data block is not S'; or, Q time-domain symbols are continuous, Q is greater than or equal to the third preset threshold, and Q is less than L'; or, Q time-domain symbols The symbols are discontinuous, Q is greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold, and Q is less than L'; wherein, L' represents the number of time-domain symbols configured for data block transmission in one time-domain unit, and S' represents the data block The location of the starting time-
  • a method for receiving data is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a receiving end device (such as a network device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the receiving end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: sending indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that one data block is sent on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1; on a first time domain unit in the N time domain units
  • the first time domain unit satisfies the following conditions: the number of consecutive time domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time domain unit is greater than or equal to L', and the starting position of the consecutive time domain symbols is not S' Or, the number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time-domain unit is less than L' and greater than or equal to the third preset threshold; or, the time for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit
  • the domain symbols are discontinuous, the total number of time domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time domain unit is greater than or equal to L'; or, the time domain symbols used to transmit data blocks on the first time domain unit are not In a continuous case, the total number of time-domain symbols available for transmitting
  • the method may include: sending indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is to be sent on N time-domain units, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the first time-domain unit in the N time-domain units The total number of time domain symbols that can be used to transmit the data block on the first time domain unit is Q, and the Q time domain symbols on the first time domain unit satisfy the following conditions: Q is greater than L' or equal to L' , and the starting position of the time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit the data block on the first time-domain unit is not S'; or, the Q time-domain symbols are continuous, Q is greater than or equal to the third preset threshold, and Q is less than L' Or, the Q time-domain symbols are discontinuous, Q is greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold, and Q is less than L'; wherein, L' represents the number of time-domain symbols configured for data block transmission on a time-domain unit , S' denotes the position of the starting time-domain symbol configured for the
  • any parameter or parameter range that can characterize the number of time-domain symbols corresponding to a data block can be used to determine whether to send the data block in a time-domain unit.
  • a data block (such as PUSCH) is sent on N time-domain units, based on the initial time-domain symbol position S' of data transmission on each configured time-domain unit and the continuously available time-domain symbol position S' The number L', the sending device sends the data block in N time domain units.
  • the available time-domain resource location of any time-domain unit in the N time-domain units does not fully meet the configured requirements of S' and L', it can be determined whether the time-domain unit is on the time-domain unit according to the conditions of the first aspect and the second aspect. available for the transmission of this data block. For example, on some time-domain units, as long as the time-domain unit meets certain conditions, the time-domain unit can be used to send data blocks.
  • the transmitting end device can use the first time domain unit to send the data block, and the corresponding Ground, the receiving end device may receive the data block on the first time domain unit.
  • the transmission scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application has more flexible requirements on the time domain unit used for transmission, can be applied to more communication scenarios, can make full use of time domain resources, and improve the performance of uplink transmission.
  • the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following: the data block occupied on the first time domain unit The time-domain symbols are discontinuous; the position of the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to S'; the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to L'.
  • the position of the time-domain resources (such as time-domain symbols) occupied by the transmitting end device for transmission on multiple time-domain units It may not be exactly the same as the position of the time domain resource that is configured to be sent repeatedly on any time domain unit.
  • the transmission may be performed according to the configured time-domain symbol positions sent on any time-domain unit, for example, according to the configured S' and L';
  • the number of time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the domain unit determines whether the time-domain unit is used to transmit data blocks, which is used to improve resource utilization.
  • the position of the starting time domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is: predefined, or indicated by the network device.
  • the information on the position of the starting time-domain symbol occupied by the data block in the first time-domain unit may be carried in high-layer signaling, or may be carried in downlink control information.
  • the position of the starting time domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is: the first time domain unit that can be used to transmit the data block.
  • a time domain symbol is: the first time domain unit that can be used to transmit the data block.
  • a method for sending data is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a transmitting end device (eg, a terminal device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the transmitting end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: receiving indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that one data block is to be sent on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1; sending on a first time domain unit among the N time domain units Data block, the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following: the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit are discontinuous; The position of the initial time domain symbol occupied by a time domain unit is not equal to S'; or, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is not equal to L'; wherein, L' is expressed as The number of time-domain symbols configured for the transmission of the data block in one time-domain unit, S' represents the position of the initial time-domain symbol configured for the transmission of the data block in one time-domain unit.
  • a data block (such as PUSCH) is sent on N time domain units, and each time domain unit based on the configuration can be used to send the starting time domain symbol position S' of the data block and the continuously available time domain The number of symbols L', the transmitting end device transmits the data block in N time domain units.
  • the available time-domain symbol position of any time-domain unit in the N time-domain units does not fully meet the configured S' and L' requirements, it can be judged whether the time-domain unit can be used for data block transmission. Three conditions determine whether the time domain unit can be used for sending data blocks.
  • the time-domain symbols occupied by the data blocks may be determined according to the specific conditions of the time-domain unit, and the time-domain symbols occupied by the data blocks may not be sent according to the configured transmission time-domain symbol positions. Send as configured S' and/or not as configured L'.
  • the time domain symbol occupied by the data block can be determined by referring to the position of the time domain symbol that can be used to transmit the data block.
  • the repeated transmission scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application has more flexible requirements on the time domain unit used for repeated transmission, can be applied to more communication scenarios, can ensure the utilization of time domain resources available for transmission as much as possible, and improve the transmission performance.
  • the method further includes: when the first time domain unit satisfies the following conditions, determining to send the data block on the first time domain unit: the first time domain unit The number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting data blocks on the unit is greater than or equal to L'; or, the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit is less than L' and greater than or equal to the third A preset threshold; or, in the case that the time domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, the total number of time domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit is greater than or equal to L' Or, when the time-domain symbols used for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit are discontinuous, the total number of time-domain symbols that can be used for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is less than L', and greater than or equal to The fourth preset threshold.
  • any parameter or parameter range that can characterize the number of time-domain symbols corresponding to a data block can be used to determine whether to perform repeated transmission of the data block in a time-domain unit.
  • a method for receiving data is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a receiving end device (such as a network device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the receiving end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: sending indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that one data block is sent on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1; on a first time domain unit in the N time domain units Receiving a data block, the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following: the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit are discontinuous; The position of the initial time domain symbol occupied by the first time domain unit is not equal to S'; or, the number of time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is not equal to L'; wherein, L' represents The number of time-domain symbols configured for the transmission of a data block on one time-domain unit, S' represents the position of the starting time-domain symbol configured for transmission of the data block on one time-domain unit.
  • the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L';
  • the number of consecutive time-domain symbols of the transmission data block is less than L' and greater than or equal to the third preset threshold; or, in the case that the time-domain symbols used for The total number of time domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the domain unit is greater than or equal to L'; or, in the case that the time domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, the The total number of time domain symbols available for transmitting the data block is less than L' and greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold.
  • a method for sending data is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a transmitting end device (eg, a terminal device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the transmitting end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: receiving indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is repeatedly sent N times in N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1; the actual repetition in N time domain units When the number of times of sending the data block is less than N, the data block is sent M times on at least one time-domain unit after the N time-domain units, where M is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1.
  • the number of times the data block is sent in N time domain units is (N-M).
  • the data block is sent M times on at least one time-domain unit after the N time-domain units, until the actual number of repeated transmissions reaches the configured number of repeated transmissions.
  • the data block is sent M times on at least one time domain unit after N time domain units, until the time domain of the data block is sent on N time domain units and at least one time domain unit after N time domain units The total number of symbols reaches N*L.
  • a data block is sent M times on at least one time-domain unit after N time-domain units, it may be determined whether to perform repeated sending on the time-domain unit according to the method described in the first aspect above.
  • the transmitting end device may perform additional repeated transmission in at least one subsequent time domain unit , until the actual total number of time-domain symbols of the repeated data block reaches N*L. Therefore, the number of time-domain symbols actually occupied when the data block is repeatedly transmitted can be guaranteed, and the transmission performance can be improved.
  • the at least one time domain unit is M time domain units.
  • M times of repeated transmission may be performed in the form of repeating typeA on the M time-domain units.
  • the number of times of sending data blocks is less than or equal to M.
  • the number of time domain symbols occupied by the data block in at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units is M*L.
  • At least one time domain unit may perform repeated transmission in the form of repeated type B.
  • a method for receiving data is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a receiving end device (such as a network device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the receiving end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: sending indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is repeatedly sent N times on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1; When the number of data blocks is less than N, the data blocks are received M times on at least one time-domain unit after the N time-domain units, where M is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1.
  • the number of times the data block is received in N time-domain units is (N-M).
  • the data block is received M times on at least one time-domain unit after the N time-domain units, until the actual number of repeated receptions reaches the configured number of repeated receptions.
  • the data block is received M times on at least one time-domain unit after N time-domain units, until the time-domain of the data block is received on N time-domain units and at least one time-domain unit after N time-domain units
  • the total number of symbols reaches N*L.
  • At least one time domain unit is M time domain units.
  • M times of repeated transmission may be performed in the form of repeating typeA on the M time-domain units.
  • the number of times the data block is received is less than or equal to M.
  • the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block in at least one time-domain unit after the N time-domain units is M*L.
  • At least one time domain unit may perform repeated transmission in the form of repeated type B.
  • a method for sending data is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a transmitting end device (eg, a terminal device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the transmitting end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: receiving indication information, where the indication information is used to instruct to transmit the same data block repeatedly; performing channel coding on the data block to obtain an encoded bit sequence; selecting a first bit sequence from the encoded bit sequence, The first bit sequence corresponds to L time domain symbols, and L represents the number of time domain symbols configured for one transmission of the data block; the second bit sequence is sent on the first time domain unit, and the second bit sequence is in the first time domain.
  • the time domain symbols occupied on the unit are discontinuous, wherein the second bit sequence is a partial bit sequence in the first bit sequence.
  • the method before sending the second bit sequence on the first time domain unit, the method further includes: mapping the first bit sequence to the first time domain symbol The bit sequence above is deleted to obtain a second bit sequence, and the first time-domain symbol is a time-domain symbol on the first time-domain unit that cannot be used to transmit a data block.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a method for sending data.
  • the method may be executed by a transmitting end device (eg, a terminal device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the transmitting end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: receiving indication information, where the indication information is used to instruct to repeatedly transmit the same data block for multiple times; transmitting the data block and the first DMRS in the first segment of consecutive time domain symbols on the first time domain unit; in the first time domain The second segment of continuous time-domain symbols on the unit transmits the data block and the second DMRS; wherein, the first time-domain unit includes W time-domain symbols, the first segment of continuous time-domain symbols and the second segment of continuous time-domain symbols are discontinuous, W represents the number of time-domain symbols contained in the first time-domain unit that can be used to transmit a data block to the last time-domain symbol that can be used to transmit a data block; the first DMRS is continuous when the first segment is continuous The position on the domain symbol and the position of the second DMRS on the second continuous time domain symbol are jointly determined according to W; or, respectively, the position of the first DMRS on the first continuous time domain symbol is based on the first continuous time domain symbol.
  • the number of time-domain symbols is determined, and the
  • the DMRS configuration of each segment can be configured uniformly , and can also be configured in sections. For example, in the case of unified configuration, the position of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and the location of the DMRS on the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols can be jointly determined according to W, which is simple and feasible.
  • the position of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols may be determined according to the number of consecutive time-domain symbols in the first segment, and the second segment of continuous time-domain symbols may be determined according to the number of consecutive time-domain symbols in the second segment.
  • the position of the DMRS on the symbol is more flexible in this way.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a method for receiving data.
  • the method may be executed by a receiving end device (such as a network device), or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the receiving end device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: sending indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is repeatedly sent multiple times; receiving the data block and the first DMRS in a first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols on the first time-domain unit; The second segment of continuous time-domain symbols on the unit receives the data block and the second DMRS; wherein, the first time-domain unit includes W time-domain symbols, the first segment of continuous time-domain symbols and the second segment of continuous time-domain symbols are discontinuous, W represents the number of time-domain symbols contained in the first time-domain unit that can be used to transmit a data block to the last time-domain symbol that can be used to transmit a data block; the first DMRS is continuous when the first segment is continuous The position on the domain symbol and the position of the second DMRS on the second continuous time domain symbol are jointly determined according to W; or, respectively, the position of the first DMRS on the first continuous time domain symbol is based on the first continuous time domain symbol.
  • the number of time-domain symbols is determined, and the position of the
  • a fourteenth aspect provides a communication apparatus for executing the method in any possible implementation manner of the foregoing aspects.
  • the apparatus includes a unit for performing the method in any one of the possible implementations of the above aspects.
  • a fifteenth aspect provides another communication device, including a processor, which is coupled to a memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory, so as to implement any possible implementation of the above-mentioned first to thirteenth aspects method in method.
  • the memory may be an on-chip storage unit inside the processor, or an off-chip storage unit located outside the processing coupled with the memory.
  • the apparatus further includes a memory.
  • the apparatus further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
  • the communication device may be a sender device (eg, a terminal device), a chip, a circuit, or a processing system configured in the sender device, or a device including the sender device.
  • a sender device eg, a terminal device
  • a chip e.g., a chip
  • a circuit e.g., a circuit
  • a processing system configured in the sender device
  • the apparatus is a sending end device or a device including a sending end device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the apparatus is a chip configured in the transmitting end device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, and the like.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • the communication device may be a receiver device (such as a network device), a chip, a circuit or a processing system configured in the receiver device, or a device including the receiver device.
  • the apparatus is a receiving end device or a device including a receiving end device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the apparatus is a chip configured in the receiver device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, and the like.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • a sixteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by an apparatus, enables the apparatus to implement the method in any of the possible implementations of the foregoing aspects.
  • a seventeenth aspect provides a computer program product comprising instructions that, when executed by a computer, cause a signaling device to implement the method in any of the possible implementations of the above aspects.
  • a communication system including at least one of the aforementioned sending end devices and at least one of the aforementioned receiving end devices, such as terminal devices and network devices.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system suitable for an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic diagram of repeated transmission of type A.
  • FIG. 3 shows yet another schematic diagram of repeated transmission of type A.
  • FIG. 4 shows yet another schematic diagram of repeated transmission of type A.
  • Figure 5 shows yet another schematic diagram of type A repeated transmission.
  • Figure 6 shows a schematic diagram of repeated transmission of type B.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of data block processing applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 shows a schematic diagram of bit selection by RV cycling during repeated transmission.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of a method for sending data according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 10 to 18 show schematic diagrams of time domain units occupied by data blocks applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 shows a schematic diagram of a method for sending data according to yet another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of a method for sending data according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 shows a schematic diagram of bit selection suitable for another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 22 shows a schematic diagram of a method for sending data according to still another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 23 and FIG. 24 show schematic diagrams of a DMRS configuration suitable for another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 25 to FIG. 26 are schematic diagrams of time domain units occupied by one data block applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus provided according to still another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device suitable for an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of a network device suitable for this embodiment of the present application.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, for example, fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) systems or new radio (NR), long term evolution (LTE) systems, LTE frequency Frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), etc.
  • 5th generation, 5G fifth generation
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD Frequency division duplex
  • TDD LTE time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to side link communication.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application may also be applied to: device to device (device to device, D2D) communication, machine to machine (machine to machine, M2M) communication, machine type communication (machine type communication, MTC), and Communication in car networking systems.
  • FIG. 1 To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, a communication system applicable to the embodiments of the present application is first described with reference to FIG. 1 .
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 100 suitable for an embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 111 shown in FIG. 1 , and the wireless communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 121 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • Both the network device and the terminal device can be configured with multiple antennas, and the network device and the terminal device can communicate using the multi-antenna technology.
  • the network device when the network device communicates with the terminal device, the network device can manage one or more cells, and there can be an integer number of terminal devices in one cell.
  • the network device 111 and the terminal device 121 form a single-cell communication system, and without loss of generality, the cell is denoted as cell #1.
  • the network device 111 may be a network device in cell #1, or in other words, the network device 111 may serve a terminal device (eg, terminal device 121) in cell #1.
  • a cell can be understood as an area within the coverage range of a wireless signal of a network device.
  • the sending end device mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be a terminal device, and the receiving end device may be a network device.
  • the transmitting end device is the terminal device 121
  • the receiving end device is the network device 111 .
  • FIG. 1 is only an exemplary illustration, and the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to any communication scenario in which data (or data blocks) need to be repeatedly sent.
  • the network device in the wireless communication system may be any device having a wireless transceiver function.
  • the equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), Radio Network Controller (Radio Network Controller, RNC), Node B (Node B, NB), Base Station Controller (Base Station Controller, BSC) , base transceiver station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS), home base station (for example, Home evolved NodeB, or Home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BaseBand Unit, BBU), Wireless Fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, WIFI) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., and can also be 5G, such as NR , a gNB in the system, or, a transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of (including multiple antenna panels) antenna panels of a base station in a 5G system
  • a gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU.
  • the gNB may also include an active antenna unit (active antenna unit, AAU for short).
  • the CU implements some functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some functions of the gNB.
  • the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implementing functions of radio resource control (RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layers.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implementing the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, the media access control (MAC) layer and the physical (PHY) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical layer
  • the higher-layer signaling such as the RRC layer signaling
  • the network device may be a device including one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node.
  • the CU can be divided into network devices in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network devices in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal equipment in the wireless communication system may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, User terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user equipment.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation security ( Wireless terminals in transportation safety), wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, and so on.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit application scenarios.
  • the demodulation reference signal is a reference signal used for data demodulation.
  • the demodulation reference signal may be a demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS) in the LTE protocol or the NR protocol, or may also be other reference signals defined in future protocols for implementing the same function.
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • the DMRS can be carried in the physical shared channel and sent together with the data block signal to perform channel estimation on the fading channel, and then complete the demodulation of the data block signal carried in the physical shared channel. For example, it is sent together with the downlink data block in the physical downlink share channel (PDSCH), or together with the uplink data block in the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).
  • the demodulation reference signal may include a demodulation reference signal sent through a physical uplink shared channel.
  • the mapping modes of PDSCH or PUSCH in the time domain may include a first mapping mode and a second mapping mode, wherein the first mapping mode may be mapping type A (mapping type A) in the NR protocol, and the second mapping mode may be NR Mapping type B (mapping type A) in the protocol.
  • the mapping manner of PDSCH or PUSCH may be indicated by higher layer signaling, for example, radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • mapping type A the starting position of the time domain symbol of the scheduled physical uplink shared channel (or physical downlink shared channel) is the first time domain symbol in a slot.
  • mapping type B the starting position of the time-domain symbol of the scheduled physical uplink shared channel (or physical downlink shared channel) is any time-domain symbol in a slot.
  • the time domain position of the demodulation reference signal may be determined relative to the position of the initial time domain symbol of the scheduled physical uplink shared channel (or the physical downlink shared channel) and the length of the time domain symbol.
  • the length of the time domain symbols can also be understood as the total number of time domain symbols.
  • the symbol position 10 of the first demodulation reference signal (ie, the first symbol position of the front-loaded demodulation reference signal (front-loaded DMRS)) may be configured as scheduled
  • the 3rd symbol or the 4th symbol of the PUSCH (or PDSCH), that is, l 0 2 or 3.
  • the demodulation reference signals may include front-load demodulation reference signals and additional demodulation reference signals.
  • a frontload demodulation reference signal is generally configured, occupying one symbol or multiple symbols in the time domain, and if multiple symbols are occupied, the multiple symbols are continuous in the time domain.
  • Additional (additional) demodulation reference signal for one transmission of one data block, the configuration of the additional demodulation reference signal is determined according to the length of one transmission of one data block. If the additional demodulation reference signal is configured, the demodulation reference signal generated by the transmitting end using the same sequence after the preload demodulation reference signal is the additional demodulation reference signal.
  • the additional demodulation reference signal may be one or more symbols after the symbol occupied by the front-load demodulation reference signal, and the last one of the symbols occupied by the front-load demodulation reference signal is the same as the symbol occupied by the additional demodulation reference signal. The first symbol is not consecutive.
  • the additional demodulation reference signal can configure resources through higher layer signaling, such as RRC signaling.
  • the additional demodulation reference signal is an optional demodulation reference signal.
  • Table 1 The table of DMRS configuration in PUSCH type B repetition in the existing protocol is shown in Table 1. It should be understood that Table 1 is only an exemplary description, and is not limited thereto. For example, in future protocols, the redefined solutions for the DMRS configuration of the DMRS for demodulating the PDSCH with a mapping type of B are all applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
  • dmrs-AdditionalPosition indicates the position of the additional DMRS.
  • PUSCH mapping type A indicates that the PUSCH mapping type is type A.
  • PUSCH mapping type B indicates that the PUSCH mapping type is type B.
  • a slot format may include several orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbols.
  • a slot format may include 14 OFDM symbols, or a slot format may include 12 OFDM symbols; or a slot format may include 7 OFDM symbols.
  • the OFDM symbols in a slot can be all used for uplink transmission; all of them can be used for downlink transmission; some of them can be used for downlink transmission, some are used for uplink transmission, and some flexible time domain symbols (which can be flexibly configured for uplink or downlink transmission) transmission). It should be understood that the above examples are only illustrative, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
  • the number of OFDM symbols included in the slot and the use of the slot for uplink transmission and/or downlink transmission are not limited to the above examples.
  • the time-domain symbols may be OFDM symbols, and the time-domain symbols may be replaced by OFDM symbols.
  • a time domain unit (also referred to as a time unit) may be one time domain symbol or several time domain symbols, or a mini-slot (mini-slot), or a slot, or a subframe (subframe), wherein, The duration of a subframe in the time domain may be 1 millisecond (ms), a slot may consist of 7 or 14 time domain symbols, and a mini-slot may include at least one time domain symbol (eg, 2 time domain symbols) symbol or 7 time domain symbols or 14 time domain symbols, or any number of symbols less than or equal to 14 time domain symbols).
  • the above-mentioned time-domain unit size is only for the convenience of understanding the solution of the present application, and should not be understood as a limitation of the present application. It can be understood that the above-mentioned time-domain unit size may be other values, which is not limited in the present application.
  • time-domain symbols and symbols are sometimes used interchangeably, which represent the same meaning.
  • a slot can include 2 symbols, 7 symbols or 14 symbols, or any number of symbols less than or equal to 14 symbols, or it can also be expressed as, a slot can include 2 time domain symbols symbol or 7 time domain symbols or 14 time domain symbols, or any number of symbols less than or equal to 14 time domain symbols.
  • a method to enhance the coverage performance is to repeatedly send data blocks. For example, the terminal device repeatedly sends the PUSCH, and the network device performs combined detection on the repeatedly sent data blocks. In this way, the channel estimation performance can be improved, the data demodulation performance can be improved, and thus the cell coverage capability can be improved.
  • the current NR protocol supports a maximum of 16 repeated transmissions for the PUSCH and a maximum of 8 repeated transmissions for the PUCCH.
  • the current NR protocol supports repeated transmission of type A for PUCCH, and repeated transmission of type A and type B for PUSCH.
  • Repeated transmission of type A refers to: N repeats need to schedule consecutive N slots, configure the starting position and total length of the time domain symbols that need to be occupied in one slot for repeated transmission, and satisfy one of the N slots.
  • a slot whose starting position and total length of time domain symbols occupied by repeated transmission are the same as the configured starting position and total length can actually be used for one repeated transmission.
  • N is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • Figure 2 assuming that 4 repeated transmissions are configured, and each repeated transmission occupies the 2nd to 10th time-domain symbols on a slot, then it needs to satisfy that the repetition of each slot needs to be in the 2nd to 10th time-domain symbols of each slot. to the 10th time-domain symbol.
  • the repeated transmission of type A is based on slot repetition.
  • the position S and the continuous duration L of the starting time domain symbol used for repeated transmission on the current slot must meet the requirements before they can be used for repeated transmission. Otherwise, the slot cannot be used for repeated transmission. send.
  • the actual number of repeated transmissions is less than the number of repeated transmissions configured by the network device, which affects the combining gain of the receiving end. For example, the expectation cannot be achieved. Therefore, the accuracy of channel estimation and demodulation and decoding will decrease, and the performance of uplink transmission will be affected.
  • each repeated transmission occupies the 1st to 10th time-domain symbols on a slot. Since the time domain symbols used for uplink transmission in the second slot start from the third time domain, the repeated transmission in the second slot is canceled, that is, the number of actual transmissions is 3.
  • each repeated transmission occupies the 1st to 10th time-domain symbols on a slot. Since there are only 8 time-domain symbols used for uplink transmission in the second slot, or there are only 8 time-domain symbols used for uplink transmission in the second slot, and S is not 0, the second slot has only 8 time-domain symbols for uplink transmission.
  • the repeated transmission is canceled, that is, the actual number of transmissions is 3.
  • each repeated transmission occupies the 1st to 10th time domain symbols on a slot.
  • the time-domain symbols used for uplink transmission in the second slot satisfy that S is 0, and the number is greater than or equal to 10. Since the time-domain symbols used for uplink transmission in the second slot are divided into time-domain symbols that cannot be used for uplink transmission.
  • the first segment of continuous time-domain symbols and the second segment of continuous time-domain symbols, at this time, the two segments of time-domain symbols are not equal to or greater than L, so the repeated transmission on the second slot is canceled, that is, the number of actual transmissions is 3.
  • the indication is: N repeated transmissions, according to the starting time domain symbol position S of the first repeated transmission, according to the number of time domain symbols L that need to be occupied by each repetition, in multiple consecutive time domain symbols Repeat sending. That is, starting from the S-th time-domain symbol of the first scheduled slot, the subsequent N*L time-domain symbols (which may extend to other slots) are used for N repeated transmissions.
  • one repeated transmission across the slot boundary will be split into two actual repeated transmissions according to the location of the slot boundary, and the transport block size (TBS) of each actual repeated transmission remains unchanged.
  • TBS transport block size
  • FIG. 6 it can be seen that in the repeated transmission of cases 2 and 3, the N*L time-domain symbols that are continuously scheduled cross the slot boundary. That is to say, in the repeated transmission in case 2, the original third transmission is considered as the third and fourth transmissions; in the repeated transmission in case 3, assuming that a slot includes 10 symbols, the configured first The normal repetition is divided into the 1st and 2nd actual repetitions.
  • the original repeated sending of the configuration means the repeated sending of the configuration, or the repeated sending of the name.
  • the original configuration of the configuration is repeatedly sent, which is simply referred to as the repeated configuration of the configuration.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a method, which can improve the performance of repeated transmission, enhance the combining gain of the receiving end, and improve the performance of uplink transmission.
  • the repeated sending method of type A is recorded as repeated type A (repetition type A)
  • the repeated sending method of type B is recorded as repeated type B (repetition type B).
  • the information bit string Before the information bit string is sent out through the physical antenna, it generally undergoes some signal processing processes, as shown in FIG. 7 .
  • Channel coding By introducing redundancy and check bits into the information bit string, after the signal reaches the receiving end, the receiving end can check each other according to the received multiple bits (including information bits and check bits). relationship, the information bit string can be better recovered.
  • NR can currently support low density parity check code (low density parity check code, LDPC) channel coding.
  • LDPC low density parity check code
  • Rate matching After the transmission of the information bit string is channel-coded to obtain a longer encoded bit string, not all the encoded bit strings are sent out directly.
  • the terminal device can determine how many bits can be sent according to the number of available resource elements (REs) and the modulation order that the network device instructs the terminal to configure, and then select from the encoded bit string (the current protocol specifies There are 4 starting points, which are approximately evenly distributed in the encoded bit string, marked as RV0, RV1, RV2, RV3).
  • REs resource elements
  • QPSK quadrature phase shift keying
  • a physical resource block (physical resource block, PRB)
  • QPSK quadrature phase shift keying
  • PRB physical resource block
  • each transmission is selected from the encoded bit string according to a predefined order.
  • the predetermined transmission order is ⁇ RV0, RV2, RV3, RV1 ⁇ .
  • the transmission is repeated four times, and bits of a certain length are selected from the position of RV0 in the encoded bit string for transmission, and bits of a certain length are selected from the position of RV2 in the encoded bit string for transmission.
  • Bits of a certain length are selected for transmission from the position of RV3 in the subsequent bit string, and bits of a certain length are selected and transmitted from the position of RV1 in the encoded bit string.
  • the bit strings corresponding to different RVs are transmitted in the form of RV cycling (RV cycling), which helps to enhance the detection performance of the receiver.
  • the transmission is performed according to RV cycling, and the 4 repeated transmissions on the 4 slots are selected and sent from the positions of RV0, RV2, RV3, and RV1 of the same TBS-encoded bit string respectively.
  • one repetition across the slot boundary is split into two actual repeated transmissions by the slot boundary, and then RV cycling is performed according to the actual repeated transmission.
  • the third repeated transmission is divided into two actual repeated transmissions because it crosses the slot boundary, which are the third actual repeated transmission and the fourth actual repeated transmission.
  • the 4th repetition is the 5th actual repetition sent.
  • the RV numbers used for the five actual repeated transmissions are ⁇ RV0, RV2, RV3, RV1, RV0 ⁇ , that is, the third
  • the RV numbers corresponding to the second actual repeated transmission and the fourth actual repeated transmission are RV3 and RV1.
  • one repeated transmission is divided into two actual repeated transmissions because it crosses the slot boundary, and each transmission after the division still maintains the TBS unchanged, but the RV cycle is still performed.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a method, which can improve the performance of repeated transmission, enhance the combining gain of the receiving end, and improve the performance of uplink transmission.
  • L represent the number of time domain symbols configured for one transmission of the data block
  • L represents the number of time domain symbols configured for a single transmission of the data block
  • L represents one repeated transmission of the data block
  • S denote the position of the starting time domain symbol configured for one transmission of the data block
  • S denote the position of the starting time domain symbol configured for a single transmission of the data block
  • S denote one time of the data block
  • K represent the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit, or K represents the number of consecutively available time-domain symbols on the first time-domain unit that can be used for transmitting the data block.
  • K' represent the total number of time domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time domain unit, or K' represents the total number of available time domain symbols on the first time domain unit that can be used for transmitting the data block.
  • repeated transmission or repeated transmission of data blocks is mentioned many times, and those skilled in the art should understand its meaning.
  • Repeated transmission or repeated transmission of the data block is used to indicate that a certain data is to be sent one or more times. This embodiment of the present application does not limit whether the content sent each time is completely the same. For example, in actual communication, the RV sent each time may be different.
  • data block may be replaced with "transmission block” or "data”, or in future protocols, names with the same or similar meanings are applicable to the embodiments of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method 900 for sending data provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Method 900 may include the following steps.
  • the transmitting end device receives indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is to be repeatedly sent N times in N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the transmitting end device sends the data block on the first time domain unit, wherein the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following: the data block is on the first time domain unit.
  • the occupied time domain symbols are discontinuous; or, the position of the initial time domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is not equal to S; or, the time domain occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit The number of symbols is not equal to L.
  • N repeated transmissions need to occupy N time domain units, and one repeated transmission is performed on each time domain unit.
  • the position of the time domain resources (eg, time domain symbols) occupied by the transmitting end device for repeated transmission on the time domain unit may not be exactly the same as the position of the configured time domain resources for one repeated transmission.
  • the transmission can be performed according to the configured time-domain symbol positions of one-time repeated transmission, such as sending according to the configured S and L; on some time-domain units, as long as the time-domain unit meets certain conditions, the This time domain unit can be used for one repeated transmission of the data block.
  • the repeated transmission scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application has more flexible requirements for the time domain unit used for repeated transmission, can be applied to more communication scenarios, can ensure the number of repeated transmissions as much as possible, and reduce the occurrence that the actual number of repeated transmissions is less than the configured number of times. The probability of occurrence of repeated transmission times improves transmission performance.
  • the N time-domain units are continuous time-domain units. That is to say, when a data block (such as PUSCH) is repeatedly transmitted for N times, the N repeated transmissions occupy consecutive N time domain units, and 1 repeated transmission is performed on each time domain unit, and on each time domain unit The time domain symbols occupied by the repeated transmissions are not exactly the same.
  • a data block such as PUSCH
  • the time domain symbols occupied by the data block in the first time domain unit may at least include one or more of the following situations.
  • the positions of the starting time-domain symbols occupied by the data blocks on multiple time-domain units may not be exactly the same.
  • the repeating transmission scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application relaxes the requirement on the position of the starting time-domain symbol.
  • the following description mainly takes the time domain unit as the slot and the data block as the PUSCH as an example for description.
  • S is the first symbol of each slot.
  • the PUSCH is sent once in each of the four slots.
  • the four slots are recorded as the first slot, the second slot, the third slot, and the fourth slot, respectively.
  • the time domain resource occupied by the PUSCH in the first transmission is the time domain symbol on the first slot, and the position of the start time domain symbol of the PUSCH on the first slot is the first symbol.
  • the time domain resource occupied by the PUSCH in the second transmission is the time domain symbol on the second slot, and the position of the start time domain symbol of the PUSCH on the second slot is the third symbol.
  • the time domain resource occupied by the PUSCH in the third transmission is the time domain symbol on the third slot, and the position of the starting time domain symbol of the PUSCH on the third slot is the first symbol.
  • the time domain resource occupied by the PUSCH in the fourth transmission is the time domain symbol on the fourth slot, and the position of the starting time domain symbol of the PUSCH on the fourth slot is the first symbol. It can be known from the example shown in FIG. 10 that the position of the starting time domain symbol occupied by the data block in the second slot is not S.
  • the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block in the first time-domain unit is not equal to L.
  • the number of time-domain symbols occupied by a data block in multiple time-domain units may not be exactly the same.
  • the repeated transmission scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application relaxes the requirement on the number of consecutive time-domain symbols.
  • the following description mainly takes the time domain unit as the slot and the data block as the PUSCH as an example for description.
  • the PUSCH is sent once in each of the four slots.
  • the time domain resource occupied by the PUSCH in the first transmission is the time domain symbol on the first slot, and the duration occupied by the PUSCH on the first slot is 10 symbols.
  • the time domain resource occupied by the PUSCH in the second transmission is the time domain symbol on the second slot, and the duration occupied by the PUSCH on the second slot is 12 symbols.
  • the time domain resource occupied by the PUSCH in the third transmission is the time domain symbol on the third slot, and the duration occupied by the PUSCH on the third slot is 10 symbols.
  • the time domain resource occupied by the PUSCH in the fourth transmission is the time domain symbol in the fourth slot, and the duration occupied by the PUSCH in the fourth slot is 10 symbols. It can be seen from the example shown in FIG. 11 that the number of consecutive time-domain symbols occupied by the data block in the second slot is not L.
  • FIG. 11 is only an exemplary illustration, and is not limited thereto.
  • the number of consecutive time-domain symbols occupied by a data block on some time-domain units may be less than L.
  • the transmitting end device can also perform a repeated transmission of the data block on the time domain unit.
  • the repeated transmission scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application relaxes the requirement that time-domain symbols must be continuous.
  • the transmitting end device may determine whether the time domain unit is available (available) based on some conditions, that is, whether to perform repeated transmission of the data block on the time domain unit.
  • the transmitting end device may perform a repeated transmission of the data block on the first time-domain unit.
  • the number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit a data block on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L.
  • K is used to represent the number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit a data block on the first time-domain unit, or K represents the number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit a data block on the first time-domain unit. number.
  • the first time domain unit is an available time domain unit, and the transmitting end device can perform a repeated transmission of the data block on the first time domain unit.
  • the following description mainly takes the time domain unit as the slot and the data block as the PUSCH as an example for description.
  • the position S of the initial time domain symbol configured for one repeated transmission of the data block is the first time domain symbol of each slot, and the configured time domain symbol for one repeated transmission of the data block
  • the number L is 10 time-domain symbols.
  • the number of consecutive time-domain symbols on the second slot is 12, which is greater than the configured number of time-domain symbols 10 required for single repeated transmission. Therefore, the second slot satisfies the condition 1, and repeated transmission can be performed on the second slot.
  • the second slot can be determined as an available time slot (available slot), that is, the PUSCH can be sent on this slot once.
  • the PUSCH may be transmitted once on K consecutive time-domain symbols.
  • the PUSCH may be sent once on K consecutive time domain symbols, as shown in FIG. 11 .
  • all consecutive time-domain symbols ie, 12 time-domain symbols
  • the PUSCH may be sent once on L time-domain symbols in K consecutive time-domain symbols, as shown in FIG. 12 to FIG. 14 .
  • the position of the starting time-domain symbol may be the X-th time-domain symbol, where X is greater than 1 or equal to 1 and less than K or an integer equal to K.
  • the leading time domain symbols can be selected.
  • the first time-domain symbol in the 12 consecutive time-domain symbols can be selected as the starting time-domain symbol, and sent on the first 10 consecutive time-domain symbols PUSCH.
  • later time domain symbols may be selected.
  • the PUSCH in the second repeated transmission, the PUSCH may be selected to be sent on 10 consecutive time-domain symbols at the back.
  • an intermediate time domain symbol may be selected. As shown in FIG. 14 , in the second repeated transmission, the second time-domain symbol in the 12 consecutive time-domain symbols may be selected as the starting time-domain symbol, and the PUSCH is transmitted on 10 consecutive time-domain symbols.
  • FIGS. 10 to 14 are only exemplary illustrations for easy understanding. Based on Condition 1, as long as the number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit the data block on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L, the transmitting end device can use the first time-domain unit to repeatedly send the data block.
  • the time domain symbols occupied by the data block in the first time domain unit may be as shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 14 , or may also be in other forms, which are not limited.
  • the time domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit may be predefined, such as predefined by a protocol or predefined by a network device; or it may be indicated by the network device to the terminal device. , and this is not limited.
  • the number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit a data block on the first time-domain unit is less than L and greater than or equal to a first preset threshold.
  • the first time-domain unit is an available time-domain unit, and the transmitting end device can perform repeated transmission on the first time-domain unit.
  • the specific value and specific determination method of the first preset threshold are not limited.
  • the value of the first preset threshold may be predefined, such as predefined by a protocol or predefined or pre-agreed by a network device, such as 4.
  • the value of the first preset threshold may also be configured by the network device and indicated to the terminal device.
  • the value of the first preset threshold may also be an empirical value estimated according to historical communication conditions.
  • the value of the first preset threshold may also be a value determined in consideration of the time domain symbols occupied by the DMRS.
  • the value of the first preset threshold is determined based on the configured number of time domain symbols L repeatedly sent once, for example, the first preset threshold value is L multiplied by a scale factor, and the scale factor may be a predefined or indicated by the network device.
  • the following description mainly takes the time domain unit as the slot and the data block as the PUSCH as an example for description.
  • S is the first symbol of each slot
  • L is 10 symbols.
  • the first preset threshold value is 5.
  • the number K of consecutive time-domain symbols on the second slot is 8, which is greater than the first preset threshold value of 5. Therefore, the second slot satisfies condition 2, and repeated transmission can be performed on the second slot.
  • the second slot can be determined as an available time slot (available slot), that is, the PUSCH can be sent on the second slot once.
  • FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are only exemplary descriptions for the convenience of understanding.
  • the first time-domain unit is an available time-domain unit, and the sending end device
  • the data block may be repeatedly transmitted using the first time domain unit.
  • the time domain symbols occupied by the data block in the first time domain unit may be as shown in FIG. 15 or FIG. 16 , or may also be in other forms, which are not limited.
  • the time domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, and the total number of time domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time domain unit is greater than or equal to L.
  • the total number of time domain symbols on the first time domain unit that can be used to transmit the data block is denoted by K'.
  • the transmitting end device can perform one repeated transmission of the data block on the first time domain unit.
  • the following description mainly takes the time domain unit as the slot and the data block as the PUSCH as an example for description.
  • S is the first symbol of each slot
  • L is 10 symbols.
  • the total number K' of time-domain symbols on the second slot is 12, which is greater than the configured number of time-domain symbols 10 required for single repeated transmission. Therefore, the second slot satisfies the condition 3, and repeated transmission can be performed on the second slot.
  • the second slot can be determined as an available time slot (available slot), that is, the PUSCH can be sent on the second slot once.
  • the PUSCH can be sent once on K' time-domain symbols. As shown in FIG. 17 , in the second repeated transmission, all time domain symbols (ie, 12 time domain symbols) in the second slot may be occupied.
  • FIG. 17 is only an exemplary illustration for the convenience of understanding.
  • the first time-domain unit is an available time-domain unit, and the sender device can use the first time-domain unit.
  • a block of data is transmitted repeatedly in a time domain unit.
  • the time-domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit may be as shown in Figure 17, or may be in other forms, such as occupying the first L time-domain symbols or occupying the last L time-domain symbols. limited.
  • the time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time-domain unit are discontinuous, and the total number of time-domain symbols used to transmit data blocks on the first time-domain unit is less than L and greater than or equal to the second Set a threshold.
  • the transmitting end device can perform one repeated transmission of the data block on the first time domain unit.
  • the specific value and specific determination method of the second preset threshold are not limited.
  • the value of the second preset threshold may be predefined, such as predefined by a protocol or predefined or pre-agreed by a network device.
  • the value of the second preset threshold may also be configured by the network device and indicated to the terminal device.
  • the value of the second preset threshold may also be an empirical value estimated according to historical communication conditions.
  • the value of the second preset threshold may also be a value determined in consideration of the time domain symbols occupied by the DMRS used for demodulating the data block.
  • the value of the second preset threshold is determined based on the configured number L of time-domain symbols that are repeatedly sent once, for example, the second preset threshold is L multiplied by a proportional coefficient, and the proportional coefficient may be a predefined or indicated by the network device.
  • the following description mainly takes the time domain unit as the slot and the data block as the PUSCH as an example for description.
  • S is the first symbol of each slot
  • L is 10 symbols.
  • the second preset threshold value is 6.
  • the total number K' of time domain symbols on the second slot is 7, which is greater than the second preset threshold value of 6. Therefore, the second slot satisfies the condition 4, and repeated transmission can be performed on the second slot.
  • the second slot can be determined as an available time slot (available slot), that is, the PUSCH can be sent on the second slot once.
  • repeated transmission may be performed on K' time-domain symbols.
  • all time domain symbols ie, 7 time domain symbols
  • all time domain symbols ie, 7 time domain symbols
  • FIG. 18 is only an exemplary illustration for the convenience of understanding.
  • the first time-domain unit is an available time-domain unit, and the sending end device
  • the data block may be repeatedly transmitted using the first time domain unit.
  • the time-domain symbols occupied by the data block in the first time-domain unit may be as shown in FIG. 18 , or may be in other forms, which are not limited.
  • any deformation belonging to the above conditions falls within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • any parameter or parameter range that can characterize the number of time-domain symbols corresponding to a data block can be applied to the embodiments of the present application, and can be used to determine whether to perform repeated transmission of the data block in a time-domain unit.
  • the actual code rate can be used to determine whether to perform a repeated transmission on the time domain unit, which is exemplified below with reference to condition 5.
  • the actual code rate when the first time domain unit is used to transmit data blocks is determined.
  • the transmitting end device can perform data block on the first time domain unit. a repeat transmission. That is to say, when the actual code rate is not too high to affect the decoding performance, it is considered that the current time-domain unit can be used for one-time repeated transmission.
  • the specific value of the first preset bit rate and the specific determination method are not limited.
  • the first preset code rate may be predefined, such as predefined by a protocol or predefined or pre-agreed by a network device.
  • the first preset bit rate may also be configured by the network device and indicated to the terminal device.
  • the manner in which the transmitting end device determines the actual code rate when the first time domain unit is used to transmit the data block may refer to the existing method.
  • the actual code rate is determined according to the configured size of the transmission block sent once repeatedly and the number of time domain symbols that are actually available. OK, no limitation on this.
  • the sending end device as a terminal device as an example, as an example and not a limitation, a possible determination method is listed below.
  • the network device indicates to the terminal device the code rate for uplink repeated transmission. For example, the network device sends modulation and coding strategy (modulation and coding scheme, MCS) information to the terminal device, indicating the code rate used by the terminal device for uplink repeated transmission. Specifically, for example, the network device may send indication information to the terminal device, indicating the information of the MCS.
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the terminal device calculates the TBS that is repeatedly sent once according to the relevant configuration information.
  • the terminal device judges the actual code rate on each time domain unit according to the calculated TBS. For example, the terminal device can determine the current time domain unit if the current time domain unit is based on the number of all REs on the actual available time domain symbols that can be used for repeated transmission, and the TBS calculated by the terminal device according to the configuration information of one repeated transmission. The actual bit rate used for one repeat transmission.
  • the calculated current time domain unit if the actual code rate used for one repeated transmission is less than or equal to the first preset code rate, that is, the actual code rate will not be too high, in this case, the actual code rate will not be too high high and affect the decoding performance, so it can be considered that the current time domain unit can be used for a repeated transmission.
  • the following description mainly takes the time domain unit as the slot and the data block as the PUSCH as an example for description.
  • the network device sends MCS information to the terminal device, indicating the code rate used for uplink repeated PUSCH transmission.
  • the terminal device calculates the TBS that is repeatedly sent once according to the relevant configuration information.
  • the terminal device judges the actual bit rate of each slot according to the calculated TBS. For example, the terminal device may determine the actual code rate of the current slot if it is used for one-time repeated transmission according to the number of all REs available for repeated transmission in the current slot, and the TBS calculated by the terminal device according to the configuration information for repeated transmission.
  • the calculated current slot is less than or equal to the first preset code rate if the actual code rate used for one-time repeated transmission, it is considered that the current slot can be used for one-time repeated transmission.
  • the repeated transmission scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application may coexist with repeated type A and repeated type B.
  • the repeated transmission scheme provided by the embodiments of the present application may be recorded as repetition type C (repetition type C) or the evolution of type A, and so on. It should be understood that, in future protocols, any names used to indicate the repeated transmission scheme provided by the embodiments of the present application are applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the repeated transmission scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application may be used.
  • a time domain unit (such as a slot) that cannot be used for repeated transmission of data blocks originally according to the existing protocol can be repeatedly sent on the available time domain symbols on the time domain unit according to certain rules.
  • the constraints on the resource configuration for repeated transmission of data blocks are relaxed, for example, as long as the time domain unit satisfies the above condition 1 or condition 2 or condition 3 or condition 4 or condition 5, the time domain unit can be used for repeated transmission. Therefore, the repeated transmission scheme provided by the embodiments of the present application makes it possible to utilize the available time domain resources (eg, time domain symbol resources) as much as possible to enhance the repeated transmission and improve the performance of uplink transmission.
  • FIG. 19 Another repeated transmission scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced with reference to FIG. 19 .
  • the method 1900 shown in FIG. 19 can be used in combination with the method 900, or can be used alone, which is not limited.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method 1900 for sending data provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Method 1900 may include the following steps.
  • the transmitting end device receives the indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is repeatedly sent N times in N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1.
  • the transmitting end device sends the data block M times on at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units, where M is greater than 1. or an integer equal to 1.
  • the transmitting end device may perform additional repeated transmissions in at least one subsequent time domain unit. Therefore, the number of repeated transmissions can be guaranteed, and the transmission performance can be improved.
  • the number of times the data block is sent in N time domain units is (N-M).
  • the sender device may perform additional repeated transmissions in subsequent time domain units until the actual number of repeated transmissions reaches the configured number of repeated transmissions.
  • the transmitting end device may perform repeated transmission on other slots after the four slots, that is, perform supplementary repeated transmission on the delayed slot (ie, an example of at least one time domain unit). , if the first slot of the delay is available, additional repeated transmission is performed on the first slot of the delay, and if the first slot of the delay is unavailable, the delay is continued until the number of transmissions is satisfied.
  • time domain unit As a slot and at least one time domain unit as at least one delay slot as an example.
  • I is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1
  • at least any of the following methods may be adopted.
  • mode 1 when repeated transmission is performed on the delayed slot, it can be judged whether repeated transmission can be performed on the slot according to the requirements for repeated type A in the existing protocol.
  • the slot can be used for repeated transmission only when the position S of the starting time-domain symbol used for repeated transmission and the number L of consecutive time-domain symbols on the slot meet the requirements. If the slot still cannot perform repeated transmission (that is, the slot is unavailable), continue to delay and continue to judge whether the transmission can be performed until the actual number of repeated transmissions reaches the configured number of repeated transmissions.
  • M data blocks are to be sent in at least M time domain units after N time domain units, wherein, each time domain unit is repeated once, and each repeated transmission needs to satisfy the type A repeated transmission requirements. S and L requirements.
  • this mode 1 there may be a situation, that is, when there are still slots that cannot be used for repeated transmission of typeA in the delayed M slots, the delay is continued, that is, the actual delay is J slots, and J is greater than M. Until the number of slots available for repeated transmission of type A in the J slots reaches M, M repeated transmissions are achieved.
  • the number of time-domain symbols occupied by each repeated transmission is L, and repeated transmissions are performed on consecutive multiple time-domain symbols until the data block
  • the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data blocks sent M times in at least one time-domain unit after the N time-domain units is M*L.
  • the position of the starting time-domain symbol may be predefined, or may be configured independently, which is not limited.
  • the position of the starting time-domain symbol may be the first time-domain symbol of the delay slot, or the first available time-domain symbol on the delay slot, or other positions.
  • Repeated transmission is carried out in the form of repeated type B, so as long as the number of time domain symbols occupied by repeated transmission on I slot reaches M*L.
  • the data block is sent multiple times on at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units, and the total number of time domain symbols occupied by the multiple sending of the data block on the at least one time domain unit is M*L , where M represents the difference between the actual number of repeated transmissions and the configured number of repeated transmissions, which can also be understood as the reduced number of repeated transmissions.
  • M represents the difference between the actual number of repeated transmissions and the configured number of repeated transmissions, which can also be understood as the reduced number of repeated transmissions.
  • the delay slot For the repetition of the delay slot, it can be determined whether the delay slot can be used for repeated transmission according to the method of the embodiment shown in method 900 . For example, it can be determined according to any one of the above-mentioned conditions 1 to 5 to determine whether the delay slot is an available time slot (available slot). Taking Condition 1 as an example, when the delay slot satisfies Condition 1, repeat the transmission on the delay slot, otherwise continue to delay until the actual number of repeated transmissions reaches the configured number of repeated transmissions, then stop repeating and continue delaying. . For the specific implementation of Mode 3, reference may be made to the description in method 900, and details are not repeated here.
  • I may be a preset value, a value indicated by the network device, or an agreed value, which is not limited.
  • Manner 5 When repeating the transmission on the delayed slot, the total number of time domain symbols actually sent on the N time domain units and at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units reaches N*L.
  • Whether the delay slot in Mode 5 is available can be determined based on 1)-3) in Mode 4 above.
  • the total number of time-domain symbols may include: the number of time-domain symbols occupied by data blocks in the N time-domain units, and the number of all time-domain symbols on at least one time-domain unit after the N time-domain units (that is, where may include the number of unavailable time-domain symbols).
  • each slot can be repeated twice, occupying 28 time-domain symbols. . Occupy the time domain symbols available in the 28 time domain symbols in the two slots for repeated transmission, and it is possible that the number of time domain symbols available for repeated transmission in the two slots is less than 28.
  • the above in conjunction with manners 1 to 7, exemplarily enumerates several manners for performing supplementary repeated transmission on the delay slot (ie, on at least one time domain unit), which is not limited thereto.
  • the data block is sent M times on at least one time-domain unit after N time-domain units, until the time-domain of the data block is repeatedly sent on N time-domain units and at least one time-domain unit after N time-domain units The total number of symbols reaches N*L.
  • the solution shown in method 1900 and the solution shown in method 900 may be used alone or in combination.
  • the transmitting end device can first perform repeated transmission based on the form of type A repeated transmission, or firstly perform repeated transmission in the form of type B repeated transmission.
  • the transmitting end device may use the solution shown in method 1900 to perform supplementary repeated transmissions on the delayed slot until the actual number of repeated transmissions reaches the configured number of repeated transmissions.
  • the transmitting end device may first perform repeated transmission based on the repeated transmission method shown in method 900, and when the actual number of repeated transmissions does not reach the configuration
  • the sending end device may further adopt the solution shown in method 1900 to perform supplementary repeated transmissions on the delayed slot until the actual number of repeated transmissions reaches the configured number of repeated transmissions.
  • the N time-domain units include at least one second time-domain unit, and the at least one second time-domain unit does not satisfy any one of the above-mentioned conditions 1 to 5, then the at least one second time-domain unit is considered to be Unusable time domain unit, so the transmission on the at least one second time domain unit is cancelled, so the delay can be continued on at least one time domain unit after N time domain units, until the actual number of repeated transmissions reaches the configuration The number of repeated transmissions.
  • the embodiment of the present application proposes that supplementary repeated transmission can be performed on the post-delay domain unit (eg, in the post-delay slot). , so as to ensure that the actual number of transmissions reaches the expected configured number of repeated transmissions, which helps to improve the performance of uplink repeated transmissions.
  • bit selection is performed, that is, from the encoded bit string Bits of a certain length are selected, and then processing such as modulation and resource mapping is performed on the selected bit string.
  • a repeated transmission may be divided into multiple segments by unavailable time domain symbols for repeated transmission, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 17 or FIG. 18 .
  • an embodiment of the present application proposes a method, which can ensure a better channel coding gain as much as possible.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method 2000 for sending data provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Method 2000 may include the following steps.
  • the bit sequence mapped on the first time domain symbol is deleted to obtain a second bit sequence, and the first time domain symbol is the time when the first time domain unit cannot be used for transmitting data blocks. Domain notation.
  • the first time domain symbol may include one or more time domain symbols, which is not limited.
  • the first bit sequence corresponds to L time domain symbols and the bit sequence mapped to the first time domain symbol, which all represent corresponding or mapped time domain symbols according to scheduling or resource allocation.
  • the correspondence or mapping or association here represents the mapping at the resource allocation level, but does not represent the mapping at the actual transmission level.
  • the first bit sequence corresponds to L time-domain symbols, which means that according to scheduling or resource allocation, the first bit sequence is originally intended to be carried on L time-domain symbols. However, in actual transmission, only part of the first bit sequence may be sent. A bit sequence, the part of the bit sequence is carried in part of the time-domain symbols in the L time-domain symbols.
  • the first bit sequence corresponds to L time-domain symbols, which means that the first bit sequence corresponds to 12 time-domain symbols, that is, the 12 time-domain symbols corresponding to the first bit sequence include: 5 time-domain symbols, and the middle 2 unavailable time-domain symbols, and the second part of the available 5 time-domain symbols.
  • Deleting the bit sequence mapped to the first time-domain symbol in the first bit sequence means deleting the bit sequence mapped to the middle two unavailable time-domain symbols.
  • the following mainly takes the time domain unit as the slot and the data block as the PUSCH as an example, and describes with reference to FIG. 21 .
  • the information bits are channel-coded to obtain a coded bit string.
  • the bit string selected corresponding to the 12 time domain symbols is the encoded bit string (that is, the first bit sequence may be shown as the shaded part in the encoded bit string, and the first bit sequence corresponds to 12 time-domain symbols).
  • the bit sequence in the shaded part (carried on 12 time-domain symbols) consists of three parts as shown in Figure 21: the bit sequence carried on the available time-domain symbols in the first part, and the bit sequence originally carried on the unavailable time-domain symbols. Bit sequence, bit sequence carried on the time domain symbols available in the second part.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a way that the bit sequence carried on the second part of the available time-domain symbols does not occur. Variety. That is, according to the position of the dotted line shown in Figure 21, delete the bit sequence carried on the unavailable time domain symbols (such as puncturing deletion), the bit sequence carried on the first part of the available time domain symbols, and the second part of the available time domain symbols. The bit sequence carried on the field symbol does not change. By directly puncturing and deleting the bit sequence carried on the unavailable time-domain symbols, the implementation is simple, and a good channel coding gain can be maintained as much as possible.
  • the available time-domain symbol may also carry a bit sequence.
  • bit selection manners may also be used in the case that a repeated transmission is divided into multiple segments by an unavailable time domain symbol for repeated transmission.
  • multiple transmissions that are cut off use the same RV number for bit selection.
  • the multiple transmissions that are cut off use the RV cycling method for bit selection.
  • a repeated transmission may be divided into multiple segments for repeated transmission by unavailable time-domain symbols.
  • rate matching for each segment the same RV number can be used, or different RV numbers can be used. .
  • the second time domain unit in Figure 17 that is, the time domain unit corresponding to the second repetition
  • the second repeated transmission of the configuration in the second slot in Figure 17 is cut into 3
  • the segment is actually sent repeatedly.
  • a possible way is to use the same RV number during rate matching. That is to say, at least two actual repeated transmissions included in the configured second repeated transmission use the same RV number, for example, RV2, then the RV number used by the configured third repeated transmission packet is RV3. That is to say, the RV numbers used for the 4 repeated transmissions in the configuration shown in FIG. 17 are ⁇ RV0, ⁇ RV2, RV2, RV2 ⁇ , RV3, RV1 ⁇ , where ⁇ RV2, RV2, RV2 ⁇ are correspondingly configured The RV number of the 3-stage actual repeated transmission included in the second repeated transmission.
  • RV numbers used for the three actual repeated transmissions of the configured second repeated transmission are: ⁇ RV2, RV3, RV1 ⁇
  • the RV number used for the third repeated transmission of the configuration is RV0.
  • the RV numbers used in the 4 repeated transmissions of the configuration shown in FIG. 17 are ⁇ RV0, ⁇ RV2, RV3, RV1 ⁇ , RV0, RV2 ⁇ , where ⁇ RV2, RV3, RV1 ⁇ correspond to the configured The RV number of the actual repeated transmission of the 3-stage repetition included in the second repetition.
  • the second repetition of the configuration in FIG. 18 is cut into two segments for actual repeated transmission. .
  • a possible way is to use the same RV number during rate matching. That is to say, at least two actual repeated transmissions included in the configured second repetition use the same RV number, for example, RV2, then the RV number used for the configured third repeated transmission is RV3. That is to say, the RV numbers used in the four repeated transmissions of the configuration shown in FIG. 18 are ⁇ RV0, ⁇ RV2, RV2 ⁇ , RV3, RV1 ⁇ , where ⁇ RV2, RV2 ⁇ respectively correspond to the second time of the configuration Repeat contains the RV number of the actual repeat transmission of the 2-segment.
  • RV numbers used for the two sections of the configured second repeated transmission are: ⁇ RV2, RV3 ⁇ , then configure The RV number used for the third repeated transmission is RV1.
  • the RV numbers used in the four repeated transmissions of the configuration shown in FIG. 18 are ⁇ RV0, ⁇ RV2, RV3 ⁇ , RV1, RV0 ⁇ , where ⁇ RV2, RV3 ⁇ respectively correspond to the second time of the configuration Repeat contains the RV number of the actual repeat transmission of the 2-segment.
  • each segment can be based on the same RV number. , or according to different RV numbers. It should be understood that the above is only an exemplary description, and all modifications belonging to the above solutions fall within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, when a repeated transmission is divided into multiple segments by an unavailable time domain symbol for repeated transmission, some segments use the same RV number and some use different RV numbers during rate matching, which is not strictly limited.
  • the solution of the method 2000 listed above may be used in combination with the solution of the method 900, or may be used alone, which is not limited.
  • the solution of method 2000 when used in combination with the solution of method 900, if the time-domain symbols occupied by a data block in one time-domain unit are discontinuous, the solution shown in method 2000 can be used for bit selection.
  • the DMRS may be carried in the physical shared channel and sent together with the data signal for demodulating the data signal carried in the physical shared channel.
  • a repeated transmission may be divided into multiple segments by unavailable time domain symbols for repeated transmission, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 17 or FIG. 18 .
  • an embodiment of the present application proposes a method to implement the repeated transmission of the switched DMRS configuration once.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method 2200 for sending data provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Method 2200 may include the following steps.
  • the sending end device receives the indication information, where the indication information is used to instruct to repeatedly send the same data block multiple times;
  • the first time-domain unit includes W time-domain symbols, the first segment of continuous time-domain symbols and the second segment
  • the consecutive time-domain symbols are discontinuous, and W represents the number of time-domain symbols contained in the first time-domain unit that can be used to transmit a data block to the last time-domain symbol that can be used to transmit a data block;
  • the first The position of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and the location of the second DMRS on the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols are jointly determined according to W; or, respectively, the first DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols
  • the position of the second DMRS is determined according to the number of consecutive time-domain symbols in the first segment, and the position of the second DMRS on the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols is determined according to the number of consecutive time-domain symbols in the second segment.
  • the position of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and the position of the DMRS on the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols may be determined according to W; or, the first segment may be determined according to the number of consecutive time-domain symbols in the first segment
  • the position of the DMRS on the second segment of consecutive time domain symbols is determined according to the number of the second segment of consecutive time domain symbols.
  • W represents the number of time domain symbols included in the time domain unit from the first time domain symbol that can be used to transmit the data block to the last time domain symbol that can be used to transmit the data block.
  • W is 12, that is, from the first time domain symbol ( The total number of time-domain symbols (ie, the last time-domain symbol) from the start of the first time-domain symbol) to the last time-domain symbol (ie, the last time-domain symbol) that can be used to transmit a data block.
  • W is 12, that is, from the first time domain symbol ( The total number of time-domain symbols (ie, the last time-domain symbol) from the start of the first time-domain symbol) to the last time-domain symbol (ie, the last time-domain symbol) that can be used to transmit a data block.
  • the second time domain unit in FIG. 17 it includes three consecutive time domain symbols, and the position of the DMRS on each consecutive time domain symbol can be determined according to the number of W time domain symbols (ie, 12), or, according to The number of time domain symbols in each segment is determined separately.
  • W is 9, that is, from the first time-domain symbol (ie, the first time-domain symbol) that can be used for transmitting data blocks to the last one that can be used for The total number of time-domain symbols (ie, the 9th time-domain symbol) of the transmission block.
  • the second time domain unit in FIG. 18 it includes two consecutive time domain symbols, and the position of the DMRS on each consecutive time domain symbol can be determined according to the number of W time domain symbols (ie, 9), or, according to The number of time domain symbols in each segment is determined separately.
  • W is 12, that is, from the first time domain symbol (ie, the first time domain symbol) that can be used to transmit data blocks to the last one that can be used to transmit data blocks.
  • the second time domain unit in FIG. 21 it includes two consecutive time domain symbols, and the position of the DMRS on each consecutive time domain symbol can be determined according to the number of W time domain symbols (ie, 12), or, according to The number of time domain symbols in each segment is determined separately.
  • the position of the DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and the location of the DMRS on the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols can be jointly determined according to W.
  • the DMRS on the slot is configured according to the method of repeating type A, and the DMRS on the available time domain symbols is reserved.
  • configure DMRS on the first time-domain symbol on the segment of consecutive time-domain symbols or configure DMRS on the last time-domain symbol on the segment of consecutive time-domain symbols , or, configure the DMRS on a certain time-domain symbol in the middle of the continuous time-domain symbols in the segment.
  • the DMRS configuration with the mapping type A of the DMRS used to demodulate the PUSCH in the existing protocol it can be known that the DMRS are configured on the three time-domain symbols numbered 10 , 6, and 9, that is, the 10 +1th symbols are configured respectively.
  • the DMRS is configured on the time-domain symbol, the seventh time-domain symbol, and the tenth time-domain symbol.
  • the DMRS is configured on the time-domain symbols as shown in FIG. 23 . Considering that the actual sixth time domain symbol and the seventh time domain symbol are unavailable, the DMRS on the seventh time domain symbol can be removed, and the DMRS on other available time domain symbols can be reserved.
  • the DMRS is configured according to the number of consecutive time-domain symbols in each segment.
  • the first time-domain symbol of each segment of consecutive symbols is used as the start time-domain symbol, and is selected from a predefined table according to the length of each segment of consecutive symbols.
  • FIG. 24 shows the positions of DMRSs on the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols (ie, the first segment of time-domain symbols) and the second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols (ie, the second segment of time-domain symbols).
  • the DMRS resource configuration of type B in Table 1 it can be known that in the two time domain symbols numbered l 0 and 4
  • the DMRS is configured on the 10 +1 th time-domain symbol and the 5th time-domain symbol is respectively configured with the DMRS.
  • the DMRS resource configuration of type B in Table 1 it can be known that in the two time-domain symbols numbered l 0 , 4
  • the DMRS is configured on the 10 +1 th time-domain symbol and the 5th time-domain symbol is respectively configured with the DMRS.
  • the scheme regarding the DMRS configuration was introduced above in conjunction with FIGS. 22 to 24 .
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a solution for repeatedly sending the cut-off DMRS configuration once, which enables the DMRS configuration mode and channel estimation of each segment.
  • the DMRS configuration of each segment may be configured uniformly or may be configured in sections.
  • the DMRSs on the unavailable time-domain symbols can be deleted or eliminated.
  • the data blocks may be replaced by PUSCH or transport blocks or data
  • the transmitting end device may be replaced by a terminal device.
  • the data block is used as the PUSCH example for description, but this does not limit the present application, and any repeatedly sent data block is applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the repeated transmission of uplink data is mainly listed, and the solution of the present application can also be used for downlink reception.
  • the network device instructs the terminal device to determine the available time slot (available slot), the terminal device determines the downlink type A repeated transmission, and receives the data of the downlink repeated transmission on the available time slot (available slot) resource, and demodulate and decode.
  • the terminal device receives the indication information sent by the network device, the indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to receive downlink data, and then the terminal device can use the above conditions 1 to 5 to determine in which time domain units the data can be received.
  • K is equal to the first preset threshold
  • K it can be considered that the time domain unit is an available time domain unit, and the transmitting end device can perform repeated transmission on this time domain unit.
  • K is equal to the first preset threshold
  • K is equal to the first preset threshold, and may also have other meanings, which are not limited.
  • the actual number of repeated transmissions is mentioned many times, which indicates the number of times that the transmitting end device actually sends the data block, or the actual or actual number of times that the data block is repeatedly sent.
  • time domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks are mentioned many times, and it should be understood that they represent time domain symbols that can or can be used to transmit data blocks.
  • flexible time domain symbols can also or can be used to transmit data blocks.
  • the above description is mainly based on an example of repeatedly sending the same data block in N time domain units, which is not limited thereto.
  • N time domain units which is not limited thereto.
  • the embodiments of the present application are all applicable. That is to say, any solution using the present application, or any modification solution belonging to the above-mentioned solution, falls within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the scheme of the present application can also be used when one data block is sent over N time domain units.
  • L' represents the number of time-domain symbols configured for data block transmission on one time-domain unit, or L' represents the number of time-domain symbols transmitted on a single time-domain unit configured for data block.
  • S' represents the position of the start time-domain symbol configured for transmission of a data block on one time-domain unit, or S' represents the position of the start time-domain symbol transmitted by a single time-domain unit configured for the data block.
  • N the number of time domain units are configured for the transmitting end device.
  • the position and number of time domain symbols used to transmit the data block on each time domain unit all the same.
  • the sender device sends the data block in N slots, and the data block transmits the configured data block in each slot.
  • the number of time-domain symbols is L', and the position of the initial time-domain symbol configured for transmission of the data block in each slot is S'.
  • the time domain unit when a certain time domain unit on the N time domain units does not meet the conditions of L' and/or S', if the time domain unit meets some conditions, the time domain unit can also be used for transmission of this data block.
  • the starting position of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the time-domain unit is not S'. If the number of consecutive time-domain symbols is greater than or equal to L', then the time-domain unit can be used for the time domain unit. transfer of data blocks.
  • the number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit a data block on the time-domain unit is less than L', and if the number of consecutive time-domain symbols is greater than or equal to a third preset threshold, then the time-domain unit can be used for transmission of this data block.
  • the value of the third preset threshold may be predefined, such as predefined by a protocol or predefined by a network device and a terminal device.
  • the value of the third preset threshold may also be configured by the network device and indicated to the terminal device.
  • the value of the third preset threshold may also be an empirical value estimated according to historical communication conditions.
  • the value of the third preset threshold may also be determined based on the number of time-domain symbols L' sent on a configured time-domain unit. For example, the third preset threshold is L' multiplied by a proportional coefficient, and the The scaling factor may be predefined or indicated by the network device.
  • the time-domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the time-domain unit are discontinuous, and if the total number of time-domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L', then the time-domain unit can be used for the transfer of this data block.
  • the time-domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the time-domain unit are discontinuous, and the total number of time-domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on this time-domain unit is less than L', if the time-domain unit can be used for If the total number of time-domain symbols in the transmission data block is greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold, the time-domain unit can be used for transmission of the data block.
  • the specific value and specific determination method of the fourth preset threshold are not limited.
  • the value of the fourth preset threshold may be predefined, such as predefined by a protocol or predefined by a network device and a terminal device.
  • the value of the fourth preset threshold may also be configured by the network device and indicated to the terminal device.
  • the value of the fourth preset threshold may also be an empirical value estimated according to historical communication conditions.
  • the value of the fourth preset threshold may also be determined based on the number L' of time-domain symbols sent on a configured time-domain unit. For example, the fourth preset threshold is L' multiplied by a proportional coefficient, and the The scaling factor may be predefined or indicated by the network device.
  • a resource mapping scheme for sending one data block in multiple time domain units is provided, and by relaxing the requirements on the location or number of resources used for sending data blocks on each time domain unit, the transmission reliability can be improved. performance and improve resource utilization.
  • time domain unit is used as a slot and the data block is used as a PUSCH as an example for description.
  • the third slot satisfies the condition, and the third slot can be used for PUSCH transmission.
  • the third slot may be determined as an available time slot (available slot), that is, the PUSCH may be sent on the third slot.
  • available slot available slot
  • the part of time domain symbols in the third slot in FIG. 25 is used for transmitting sounding reference signals (sounding reference signals, SRS) is only an exemplary illustration, which does not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the third slot is an S subframe, that is, some time domain symbols are used for downlink transmission, some time domain symbols are used for uplink transmission, and some are flexible time domain symbols.
  • the first six time-domain symbols are downlink time-domain symbols
  • the middle four time-domain symbols are flexible time-domain symbols for switching
  • the last four time-domain symbols are uplink time-domain symbols Domain notation.
  • the third slot does not meet the requirements of the initial time domain symbol position (that is, S' is the first symbol of each slot), but the flexible time domain symbols and uplink time domain symbols on the third slot can be used for Uplink transmission, that is, the number of time domain symbols used for uplink transmission can reach 8, which is greater than the third preset threshold value of 6. Therefore, the third slot satisfies the condition, and the third slot can be used for PUSCH transmission.
  • the third slot may be determined as an available time slot (available slot), that is, the PUSCH may be sent on the third slot.
  • the methods and operations implemented by the transmitting end device may also be implemented by a component (such as a chip or circuit) that can be used in the terminal device, and the receiving end device (such as a terminal device) can also be implemented.
  • the methods and operations implemented by network equipment can also be implemented by components (eg, chips or circuits) that can be used in network equipment.
  • each network element such as a sending end device or a receiving end device, includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to executing the respective functions in order to implement the above functions.
  • a sending end device or a receiving end device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to executing the respective functions in order to implement the above functions.
  • the present application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. middle.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, and can also be implemented in the form of software function modules. It should be noted that, the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division manners in actual implementation. The following description will be given by taking as an example that each function module is divided corresponding to each function.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 2700 includes a transceiver unit 2710 and a processing unit 2720 .
  • the transceiver unit 2710 can implement corresponding communication functions, and the processing unit 2720 is used for data processing.
  • Transceiver unit 2710 may also be referred to as a communication interface or a communication unit.
  • the communication apparatus 2700 may further include a storage unit, which may be used to store instructions and/or data, and the processing unit 2720 may read the instructions and/or data in the storage unit, so that the communication apparatus implements the foregoing method Example.
  • a storage unit which may be used to store instructions and/or data
  • the processing unit 2720 may read the instructions and/or data in the storage unit, so that the communication apparatus implements the foregoing method Example.
  • the communication apparatus 2700 may be used to perform the actions performed by the sending end device (such as a terminal device) in the above method embodiments.
  • the communication apparatus 2700 may be a sending end device or a component that can be configured on the sending end device, and transmits and receives
  • the unit 2710 is configured to perform the operations related to sending and receiving on the side of the sending end device in the above method embodiments
  • the processing unit 2720 is configured to perform the operations related to the processing on the side of the sending end device in the above method embodiments.
  • the communication apparatus 2700 may be used to perform the actions performed by the receiving end device (such as a network device) in the above method embodiments.
  • the communication apparatus 2700 may be a receiving end device or a component that can be configured on the receiving end device.
  • the transceiving unit 2710 is configured to perform the operations related to the sending and receiving on the receiving end device side in the above method embodiments
  • the processing unit 2720 is configured to perform the processing related operations on the receiving end device side in the above method embodiments.
  • the communication apparatus 2700 is configured to perform the actions performed by the sender device (such as a terminal device) in the above method embodiments.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is used to: receive indication information, the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is to be repeatedly sent N times on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1;
  • the data block is sent on a first time-domain unit in the time-domain unit, wherein the first time-domain unit satisfies the following conditions: the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L, and
  • the starting position of the continuous time domain symbol is not S, and S represents the position of the starting time domain symbol configured for one transmission of the data block; or, the first time domain unit can be used to transmit the continuous time domain symbol of the data block.
  • the number is less than L and greater than or equal to the first preset threshold; or, in the case that the time domain symbols available for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, the time domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit are discontinuous.
  • the total number of domain symbols is greater than or equal to L; or, in the case that the time domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, the total number of time domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time domain unit is less than L and is greater than or equal to the second preset threshold; or, the actual code rate when the first time domain unit is used to transmit the data block is less than or equal to the first preset code rate; wherein, L represents one time of the data block The number of time-domain symbols configured for transmission.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit, the receiving unit is configured to receive indication information, and the sending unit is configured to send a data block on a first time domain unit among the N time domain units.
  • the processing unit 2720 is configured to: determine whether the first time domain unit satisfies the above condition.
  • the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following: the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit are discontinuous; The position of the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the time-domain unit is not equal to S; the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to L; where S represents the value of the data block in one transmission. The location of the configured starting time domain symbols.
  • the position of the starting time domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is: predefined, or indicated by the network device.
  • the position of the starting time-domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is: the first time-domain symbol that can be used for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is configured to: receive indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is repeatedly sent N times on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the data block is sent on the first time-domain unit in the time-domain unit, and the time-domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit include one or more of the following:
  • the time-domain symbols are discontinuous; or, the position of the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to S; or, the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit not equal to L; wherein, L represents the number of time-domain symbols configured for one transmission of the data block, and S represents the position of the initial time-domain symbol configured for one transmission of the data block.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit, the receiving unit is configured to receive indication information, and the sending unit is configured to send a data block on a first time domain unit among the N time domain units.
  • the processing unit 2720 is configured to: determine that the first time-domain unit satisfies the following conditions: the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L; or, the first time-domain unit The number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time-domain unit is less than L and greater than or equal to the first preset threshold; or, when the time-domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, the first The total number of time-domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on a time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L; or, when the time-domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit are discontinuous, the first time-domain unit The total number of time-domain symbols available for transmitting a data block is less than L and greater than or equal to a second preset threshold.
  • the processing unit 2720 is configured to: perform channel coding on the data block to obtain an encoded bit sequence; select a first bit sequence from the encoded bit sequence, where the first bit sequence corresponds to L time domain symbols; send and receive
  • the unit 2710 is specifically configured to: send a second bit sequence on the first time domain unit, the time domain symbols occupied by the second bit sequence on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, wherein the second bit sequence is the first bit sequence part of the bit sequence in .
  • processing unit 2720 is further configured to: delete the bit sequence in the first bit sequence on the time-domain symbols originally carried on the first time-domain unit that cannot be used for transmitting the data block.
  • the first time-domain unit includes W time-domain symbols
  • the W time-domain symbols include a first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and a second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols, the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and a second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols Continuous time-domain symbols are discontinuous
  • W represents the number of time-domain symbols contained in the first time-domain unit that can be used to transmit a data block to the last time-domain symbol that can be used to transmit a data block
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is specifically used to: send the data block and the first demodulation reference signal DMRS on the first continuous time domain symbol, and send the data block and the second DMRS on the second continuous time domain symbol;
  • the position of a segment of consecutive time domain symbols and the position of the second DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time domain symbols are determined according to W; or, the position of the first DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time domain symbols is determined according to the first segment of consecutive time domain symbols
  • the number of time-domain symbols is determined,
  • the N time-domain units include M second time-domain units
  • the N time-domain units include M second time-domain units
  • the second time-domain units are time-domain units that do not transmit data blocks
  • the data The number of times a block is sent in N time domain units is (N-M), where M is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1 and less than N.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is further configured to: transmit the data block M times on at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is specifically configured to: send the data block M times on M time-domain units after the N time-domain units, and send the data block once on each time-domain unit.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is specifically configured to: start from a starting time domain symbol on at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units, and the number of time domain symbols occupied by each repeated data block is L , the data block is repeatedly sent on multiple consecutive time domain symbols, until the data block is sent M times on at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units, and the number of time domain symbols occupied by the data block is M*L.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is configured to: receive indication information, where the indication information is used to instruct to send a data block in N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1;
  • the data block is sent on the first time-domain unit in the unit, wherein the first time-domain unit satisfies the following conditions: the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L', and the The starting position of the time-domain symbols is not S'; or, the number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time-domain unit is less than L' and greater than or equal to a third preset threshold; or, the first In the case where the time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the time-domain unit are discontinuous, the total number of time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L'; or, the first time-domain unit In the case where the time-domain symbols
  • the transceiver unit 2710 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit, the receiving unit is configured to receive indication information, and the sending unit is configured to send a data block on a first time domain unit among the N time domain units.
  • the processing unit 2720 is configured to: determine whether the first time domain unit satisfies the above condition.
  • the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following: the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit are discontinuous; The position of the initial time domain symbol occupied on the time domain unit is not equal to S'; the number of time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is not equal to L'.
  • the position of the starting time domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is: predefined, or indicated by the network device.
  • the position of the starting time-domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is: the first time-domain symbol that can be used for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is used to: receive indication information, the indication information is used to indicate that a data block is to be sent on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the data block is sent on the first time domain unit in the Discontinuous; or, the position of the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to S'; or, the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to L'; where L' represents the number of time-domain symbols configured for the transmission of the data block on a time-domain unit, and S' represents the initial time-domain symbols configured for the transmission of the data block on a time-domain unit Location.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit, the receiving unit is configured to receive indication information, and the sending unit is configured to send a data block on a first time domain unit among the N time domain units.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 determines to send the data block on the first time domain unit: the first time domain unit can be used to transmit the continuous time domain symbols of the data block.
  • the number is greater than or equal to L'; or, the number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit is less than L' and greater than or equal to the third preset threshold; or, the first time-domain unit uses
  • the total number of time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit the data block on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L'; or, the first time-domain unit is used for transmitting data.
  • the time-domain symbols of the blocks are discontinuous, the total number of time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is less than L' and greater than or equal to a fourth preset threshold.
  • the communication apparatus 2700 may implement steps or processes corresponding to those performed by the sending end device (such as a terminal device) in the method embodiments according to the embodiments of the present application, and the communication apparatus 2700 may include a method for performing the sending in FIG. 9 to FIG. 26 .
  • a unit of a method performed by an end device eg, an end device.
  • each unit in the communication apparatus 2700 and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions are respectively to implement the corresponding processes of the method embodiments in FIG. 9 to FIG. 26 .
  • the transceiver unit 2710 can be used to execute steps 910 and 920 in the method 900; the processing unit 2720 can be used to execute the processing steps in the method 900, such as determining the time domain Whether the unit is eligible.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 can be used to execute steps 1910 and 1920 in the method 1900 ; the processing unit 2720 can be used to execute the processing steps in the method 1900 , such as judging for supplementary transmission.
  • the time domain unit of the data block can be used to execute the processing steps in the method 1900 , such as judging for supplementary transmission.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 can be used to execute steps 2010 and 2040 in the method 2000 ; the processing unit 2720 can be used to execute steps 2020 and 2030 of the method 2000 .
  • the transceiver unit 2710 can be used to perform steps 2210 , 2220 and 2230 in the method 2200 ; the processing unit 2720 can be used to perform the processing steps in the method 2200 .
  • the communication apparatus 2700 is configured to perform the actions performed by the receiving end device (eg, network device) in the above method embodiments.
  • the receiving end device eg, network device
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is used to: send indication information, the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is to be repeatedly sent N times on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1;
  • a data block is received on the first time-domain unit in the time-domain unit, and the first time-domain unit satisfies the following conditions: the number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit the data block on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L, and the consecutive time The starting position of the domain symbol is not S, and S represents the position of the starting time domain symbol configured for one transmission of the data block; or, the number of consecutive time domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time domain unit is less than L, and is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold; or, in the case that the time domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, the time domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit The total number of time-domain symbols is
  • the transceiver unit 2710 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit, the sending unit is configured to send indication information, and the receiving unit is configured to receive a data block on a first time domain unit among the N time domain units.
  • the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following: the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit are discontinuous; The position of the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the time-domain unit is not equal to S; the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to L; where S represents the value of the data block in one transmission. The location of the configured starting time domain symbols.
  • the position of the starting time domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is: predefined, or indicated by the network device.
  • the position of the starting time-domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is: the first time-domain symbol that can be used for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is configured to: send indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the same data block is repeatedly sent N times on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the data block is received on the first time domain unit in the time domain unit, and the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following:
  • the time-domain symbols are discontinuous; or, the position of the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to S; or, the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit not equal to L; wherein, L represents the number of time-domain symbols configured for one transmission of the data block, and S represents the position of the initial time-domain symbol configured for one transmission of the data block.
  • the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L; or, the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is less than L, and is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold; or, when the time domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, the total number of time domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit is greater than or equal to L; or, when the time-domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit are discontinuous, the total number of time-domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit is less than L, and greater than or equal to the second preset threshold.
  • the first time-domain unit includes W time-domain symbols
  • the W time-domain symbols include a first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and a second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols
  • the first segment of consecutive time-domain symbols and a second segment of consecutive time-domain symbols Continuous time-domain symbols are discontinuous
  • W represents the number of time-domain symbols contained in the first time-domain unit that can be used to transmit a data block to the last time-domain symbol that can be used to transmit a data block
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is specifically used to: receive the data block and the first demodulation reference signal DMRS on the first continuous time domain symbol, and receive the data block and the second DMRS on the second continuous time domain symbol;
  • the position of a segment of consecutive time domain symbols and the position of the second DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time domain symbols are determined according to W; or, the position of the first DMRS on the first segment of consecutive time domain symbols is determined according to the first segment of consecutive time domain symbols
  • the number of time-domain symbols is determined
  • the N time-domain units include M second time-domain units, the second time-domain units are time-domain units that do not receive data blocks, and the number of times the data blocks are received in the N time-domain units is ( N-M), where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than N.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is further configured to: receive the data block M times on at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is specifically configured to: receive data blocks M times on M time-domain units after the N time-domain units, and receive a data block once on each time-domain unit.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is specifically configured to: start from a starting time domain symbol on at least one time domain unit after the N time domain units, and the number of time domain symbols occupied by each repeated data block is L , repeatedly receiving data blocks on multiple consecutive time-domain symbols until the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block received M times on at least one time-domain unit after the N time-domain units is M*L.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is configured to: send indication information, the indication information is used to indicate that one data block is to be sent on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1; A data block is received on the first time domain unit in the unit, and the first time domain unit satisfies the following conditions: the number of consecutive time domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time domain unit is greater than or equal to L', and the consecutive time domain symbols The starting position of the symbol is not S'; or, the number of consecutive time-domain symbols that can be used to transmit data blocks on the first time-domain unit is less than L' and greater than or equal to a third preset threshold; or, the first time-domain unit In the case that the time-domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the unit are discontinuous, the total number of time-domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L'; In the case that the time domain symbols of the transmission data block are discontinuous,
  • the transceiver unit 2710 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit, the sending unit is configured to send indication information, and the receiving unit is configured to receive a data block on a first time domain unit among the N time domain units.
  • the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following: the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit are discontinuous; The position of the initial time domain symbol occupied on the time domain unit is not equal to S'; the number of time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is not equal to L'.
  • the position of the starting time domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit is: predefined, or indicated by the network device.
  • the position of the starting time-domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is: the first time-domain symbol that can be used for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 is configured to: send indication information, the indication information is used to indicate that one data block is to be sent on N time domain units, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1;
  • the first time domain unit in the unit receives the data block, and the time domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit include one or more of the following: the time domain occupied by the data block on the first time domain unit The symbols are discontinuous; or, the position of the initial time-domain symbol occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to S'; or, the number of time-domain symbols occupied by the data block on the first time-domain unit is not equal to is equal to L'; wherein, L' represents the number of time domain symbols configured for the transmission of the data block on one time domain unit, and S' represents the initial time domain symbol configured for the transmission of the data block on one time domain unit s position.
  • the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is greater than or equal to L'; or, the number of consecutive time-domain symbols available for transmitting the data block on the first time-domain unit is less than L ', and is greater than or equal to the third preset threshold; or, when the time domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit are discontinuous, the time domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the first time domain unit
  • the total number of time-domain symbols is greater than or equal to L'; or, in the case that the time-domain symbols used for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit are discontinuous, the total number of time-domain symbols that can be used for transmitting data blocks on the first time-domain unit is less than L' and greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold.
  • the communication apparatus 2700 may implement steps or processes corresponding to those performed by a receiving end device (such as a network device) in the method embodiments according to the embodiments of the present application, and the communication apparatus 2700 may include a method for performing the receiving in FIG. 9 to FIG. 26 .
  • a unit of a method performed by an end device eg, a network device.
  • each unit in the communication apparatus 2700 and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions are respectively to implement the corresponding processes of the method embodiments in FIG. 9 to FIG. 26 .
  • the transceiver unit 2710 can be used to perform steps 1910 and 1920 in the method 1900
  • the processing unit 2720 can be used to perform the processing steps in the method 1900 .
  • the transceiver unit 2710 can be used to perform steps 2010 and 2040 in the method 2000
  • the processing unit 2720 can be used to perform the processing steps in the method 2000 .
  • the transceiver unit 2710 can be used to perform steps 2210 , 2220 and 2230 in the method 2200
  • the processing unit 2720 can be used to perform the processing steps in the method 2200 .
  • the processing unit 2720 in the above embodiments may be implemented by at least one processor or processor-related circuits.
  • the transceiver unit 2710 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit.
  • the storage unit may be implemented by at least one memory.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication apparatus 2800 .
  • the communication device 2800 includes a processor 2810 coupled with a memory 2820 for storing computer programs or instructions and/or data, and the processor 2810 for executing the computer programs or instructions and/or data stored in the memory 2820, The methods in the above method embodiments are caused to be executed.
  • the communication apparatus 2800 includes one or more processors 2810 .
  • the communication apparatus 2800 may further include a memory 2820 .
  • the communication device 2800 may include one or more memories 2820 .
  • the memory 2820 may be integrated with the processor 2810, or provided separately.
  • the communication apparatus 2800 may further include a transceiver 2830, and the transceiver 2830 is used for signal reception and/or transmission.
  • the processor 2810 is used to control the transceiver 2830 to receive and/or transmit signals.
  • the communication apparatus 2800 is configured to implement the operations performed by the sender device (eg, terminal device) in the above method embodiments.
  • the processor 2810 is used to implement the processing-related operations performed by the sending end device (such as a terminal device) in the above method embodiments
  • the transceiver 2830 is used to implement the above method embodiments by the sending end device (such as a terminal device). ) to perform sending and receiving related operations.
  • the communication apparatus 2800 is configured to implement the operations performed by the receiver device (eg, network device) in the above method embodiments.
  • the processor 2810 is used to implement the processing-related operations performed by the receiving end device (such as a network device) in the above method embodiments
  • the transceiver 2830 is used to implement the above method embodiments by the receiving end device (such as a network device). ) to perform sending and receiving related operations.
  • This embodiment of the present application further provides a communication apparatus 2900, where the communication apparatus 2900 may be a sending end device (eg, a terminal device) or a chip.
  • the communication apparatus 2900 can be used to perform the operations performed by the sender device (eg, terminal device) in the above method embodiments.
  • FIG. 29 shows a schematic structural diagram of a simplified terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control terminal equipment, execute software programs, and process data of software programs.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and the processing of the radio frequency signal.
  • Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal equipment may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, which converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device or the like.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna and the radio frequency circuit with a transceiver function may be regarded as a transceiver unit of the terminal device, and the processor with a processing function may be regarded as a processing unit of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 2910 and a processing unit 2920 .
  • the transceiver unit 2910 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, or the like.
  • the processing unit 2920 may also be referred to as a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and the like.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 2910 may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver unit 2910 may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit 2910 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
  • the transceiver unit may also sometimes be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiving unit may also sometimes be referred to as a receiver, receiver, or receiving circuit, or the like.
  • the transmitting unit may also sometimes be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, or the like.
  • the processing unit 2920 is configured to perform the processing actions on the side of the sending end device in the method 900.
  • the processing unit 2920 is used to perform the processing steps in the method 900, such as determining whether the time domain unit meets the conditions;
  • the processing unit 2920 is configured to perform the processing actions on the side of the sending end device in the method 1900 .
  • the processing unit 2920 is used to perform the processing steps in the method 1900, such as determining the time domain unit for supplementary transmission of the data block;
  • the processing unit 2920 is configured to perform the processing actions on the sending end device side in the method 2000 .
  • the processing unit 2920 is configured to perform processing steps in the method 2000, such as steps 2020 and 2030;
  • the processing unit 2920 is configured to perform the processing actions on the side of the sending end device in the method 2200 .
  • the processing unit 2920 is configured to perform the processing steps in the method 2200 ;
  • the transceiving unit 2910 is configured to perform the transceiving operations in the method 2200 , such as step 2210 , step 2220 , and step 2230 .
  • FIG. 29 is only an example and not a limitation, and the above-mentioned terminal device including a transceiver unit and a processing unit may not depend on the structure shown in FIG. 29 .
  • the chip When the device 2900 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit may be a processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
  • the apparatus 2900 is a chip system or a processing system, the device on which the apparatus 2900 is installed can implement the methods and functions of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processing unit 2920 can be a chip system or a processing circuit in the processing system, which can control the device on which the chip system or the processing system is installed, and can also be coupled to a storage unit to call instructions in the storage unit, so that the device can implement
  • the transceiver unit 2910 may be an input/output circuit in a chip system or a processing system, which outputs information processed by the chip system, or inputs data or signaling information to be processed into the chip system for processing. .
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a communication apparatus 3000, where the communication apparatus 3000 may be a receiving end device (eg, a network device) or a chip.
  • the communication apparatus 3000 may be configured to perform the operations performed by the receiving end device (eg, network device) in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • FIG. 30 shows a simplified schematic diagram of a base station structure.
  • the base station includes part 3010 and part 3020.
  • the 3010 part is mainly used for sending and receiving radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals; the 3020 part is mainly used for baseband processing and controlling the base station.
  • the 3010 part can generally be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver.
  • the 3020 part is usually the control center of the base station, which can usually be referred to as a processing unit, and is used to control the base station to perform the processing operations on the receiving end device side in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the transceiver unit of part 3010 which may also be called a transceiver or a transceiver, etc., includes an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, where the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for radio frequency processing.
  • the device used for implementing the receiving function in part 3010 may be regarded as a receiving unit
  • the device used for implementing the sending function may be regarded as a sending unit, that is, part 3010 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit, and the like
  • the transmitting unit may be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, and the like.
  • the 3020 portion may include one or more single boards, each of which may include one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the processor is used to read and execute the program in the memory to realize the baseband processing function and control the base station. If there are multiple boards, each board can be interconnected to enhance the processing capability.
  • one or more processors may be shared by multiple boards, or one or more memories may be shared by multiple boards, or one or more processors may be shared by multiple boards at the same time. device.
  • the transceiving unit in part 3010 is used to perform the transceiving-related steps performed by the network device in the method 900 ; the part 3020 is used to perform the processing-related steps performed by the network device in the method 900 .
  • the transceiving unit in part 3010 is used to perform the transceiving-related steps performed by the network device in the method 1900 ; the part 3020 is used to perform the processing-related steps performed by the network device in the method 1900 .
  • the transceiving unit in part 3010 is used to perform the transceiving-related steps performed by the network device in the method 2000; the part 3020 is used for performing the processing-related steps performed by the network device in the method 2000.
  • the transceiving unit in part 3010 is used to perform the transceiving-related steps performed by the network device in the method 2200; the part 3020 is used for performing the processing-related steps performed by the network device in the method 2200.
  • FIG. 30 is only an example and not a limitation, and the above-mentioned network device including a transceiver unit and a processing unit may not depend on the structure shown in FIG. 30 .
  • the chip When the device 3000 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit may be a processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
  • the apparatus 3000 may also be a chip system or a processing system, so that a device on which the apparatus 3000 is installed can implement the methods and functions of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processing unit 3020 can be a chip system or a processing circuit in the processing system, which can control the device on which the chip system or the processing system is installed, and can also be coupled and linked to the storage unit to call the instructions in the storage unit, so that the device can implement
  • the transceiver unit 3010 may be an input/output circuit in a chip system or a processing system, which outputs information processed by the chip system, or inputs data or signaling information to be processed into the chip system for processing. .
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, on which is stored a method for implementing the method executed by a sending end device (such as a terminal device) in the above method embodiments, or a method executed by a receiving end device (such as a network device) computer instructions for the method.
  • a sending end device such as a terminal device
  • a receiving end device such as a network device
  • the computer when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device in the above method embodiments.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product containing instructions, which, when executed by a computer, enable the computer to implement the method executed by the sending end device (such as a terminal device) in the above method embodiments, or the receiving end device (such as a terminal device) network device).
  • the sending end device such as a terminal device
  • the receiving end device such as a terminal device network device
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, where the communication system includes the sending end device and the receiving end device in the above embodiments, such as a terminal device and a network device.
  • processors mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), application-specific integrated circuits ( application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable read-only memory (EPROM). Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM).
  • RAM can be used as an external cache.
  • RAM may include the following forms: static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM) , double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and Direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • Direct memory bus random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the processor is a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, or discrete hardware components
  • the memory storage module
  • memory described herein is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
  • the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to implement the solution provided in this application.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the computer may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device or the like.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center is by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that includes an integration of one or more available media.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disks (SSDs)), etc.
  • the medium may include, but is not limited to: U disk, removable hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置。该方法可包括：接收指示信息，用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次数据块；在N个时域单元中的时域单元满足一定条件的情况下，在该时域单元上发送数据块。例如，该时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目足够大；或者，时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续、但该时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目足够多。本申请对用于重复发送的时域单元的要求更加灵活，可以适用更多的通信场景，能够尽可能地保证重复发送次数，减小出现实际重复发送次数小于配置的重复发送次数的发生的概率，提高发送性能。

Description

发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置
本申请要求于2020年12月22日提交中国专利局、申请号为PCT/CN2020/138424、申请名称为“发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置”的PCT国际申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及无线通信领域，并且更具体地，涉及一种发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置。
背景技术
在当前新空口(new radio，NR)系统的上行发送中，受限于终端设备的发送能力，例如：天线数目较少、基带芯片处理一般、有限的上行发送功率等制约因素，相比于下行传输，上行发送的传输性能面临着更大的挑战。尤其是在远距离、深衰落等场景下，终端设备的上行发送性能可能会急剧恶化。
然而，如果要实现对上行数据的正确解调，基站侧对接收到的上行信号的信噪比(signal to noise power ratio，SNR)有一定的门限要求，例如可以称之为接收机的灵敏度。只有当基站侧接收的上行信号的SNR高于灵敏度时，才能保证正确的信号估计和数据解调。
如何改善上行传输的性能是亟需解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请提供一种发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置，以提高重复发送的性能。
第一方面，提供了一种发送数据的方法。该方法可以由发送端设备(如终端设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于发送端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块，其中，第一时域单元满足以下条件：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L，且连续时域符号的起始位置不为S，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限；或者，第一时域单元用于传输数据块时的实际码率小于或等于第一预设码率；其中，L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目。
或者，该方法可以包括：接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目为Q，第一时域单元满足以下条件：Q大于L或等于L，且第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的起始位置不为S，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置；或者，Q个时域符号连续，Q大于或等于第一预设门限、且Q小于L；或者，Q个时域符号不连续，Q大于或等于第二预设门限、且Q小于L；其中，L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目。
第二方面，提供了一种接收数据的方法。该方法可以由接收端设备(如网络设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于接收端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：发送指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收数据块，第一时域单元满足以下条件：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L，且连续时域符号的起始位置不为S，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限；其中，L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目。
或者，该方法可以包括：发送指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收数据块，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目为Q，第一时域单元上的Q个时域符号满足以下条件：Q大于L或等于L，且第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的起始位置不为S，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置；或者，Q个时域符号连续，Q大于或等于第一预设门限、且Q小于L；或者，Q个时域符号不连续，Q大于或等于第二预设门限、且Q小于L；其中，L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目。
应理解，任何可以表征一个数据块对应的时域符号数目的参数或者参数范围，都可以用来判断是否在时域单元上进行该数据块的一次重复发送。例如，可以使用码率来判断是否在时域单元上进行一次重复发送。
示例地，第一时域单元用于传输数据块的实际码率小于或等于第一预设码率。实际码率由配置的一次重复发送的传输块大小和第一时域单元实际可用的时域符号数目确定。
示例地，第一预设码率可以是预定义的，也可以是网络设备指示的。
示例地，第一预设码率可以一个门限取值，或者也可以是一个范围。
基于上述技术方案，重复发送某一数据块(如PUSCH)时，N次重复发送需要占据N个时域单元，在每个时域单元上进行1次重复发送。发送端设备在时域单元上的重复发送所占据的时域资源(如时域符号)的位置，可以与配置的一次重复发送的时域资源的位置不完全相同。例如，在有些时域单元上，只要该时域单元满足一定条件，就可以使用该 时域单元进行数据块的一次重复发送。以第一时域单元为例，只要第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号满足一定的条件，或者第一时域单元用于传输数据块时的实际码率满足一定条件，发送端设备均可以使用该第一时域单元进行一次重复发送，相应地，接收端设备可以在该第一时域单元上接收到数据块。本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案，对用于重复发送的时域单元的要求更加灵活，可以适用更多的通信场景，能够充分利用时域资源，尽可能地保证重复发送次数，减小出现实际重复发送次数小于配置的重复发送次数的情况发生的概率，提高发送性能。
结合第一方面或第二方面，在某些实现方式中，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S；数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L；其中，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
基于上述技术方案，重复发送某一数据块(如PUSCH)时，发送端设备在时域单元上的重复发送所占据的时域资源(如时域符号)的位置，可以与配置的一次重复发送的时域资源的位置不完全相同。例如，在有些时域单元上可以按照配置的一次重复发送的时域符号位置进行发送，如按照配置的S和L进行发送；在有些时域单元上，可以根据该时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号，确定发送数据块的时域符号。因此，可以提高资源的利用率。
结合第一方面或第二方面，在某些实现方式中，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：预定义的，或者，网络设备指示的。
示例地，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置的信息，可以承载于高层信令中，也可以承载于下行控制信息中。
结合第一方面或第二方面，在某些实现方式中，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的第一个时域符号。
第三方面，提供了一种发送数据的方法。该方法可以由发送端设备(如终端设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于发送端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L；其中，L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
基于上述技术方案，重复发送某一数据块(如PUSCH)时，N次重复发送需要占据N个时域单元，在每个时域单元上进行1次重复发送。发送端设备在时域单元上的重复发送所占据的时域资源(如时域符号)的位置，可以与配置的一次重复发送的时域资源的位置不完全相同。例如，在有些时域单元上(如第一时域单元)可以按照该时域单元的具体情况确定数据块所占的时域符号，不按照配置的一次重复发送的时域符号位置进行发送，如不按照配置的S和/或不按照配置的L进行发送。如可以参考可用于传输数据块的时域符号的位置，来确定数据块所占的时域符号。本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案，对用于 重复发送的时域单元的要求更加灵活，可以适用更多的通信场景，能够尽可能地保证重复发送次数，减小出现实际重复发送次数小于配置的重复发送次数的发生的概率，提高发送性能。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：在第一时域单元满足以下条件的情况下，确定在第一时域单元上发送一次数据块：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输2数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限。
应理解，任何可以表征一个数据块对应的时域符号数目的参数或者参数范围都可以用来判断是否在时域单元上进行该数据块的一次重复发送。例如，可以使用码率来判断是否在时域单元上进行一次重复发送。
示例地，第一时域单元用于传输数据块的实际码率小于或等于第一预设码率。
结合第一方面或第三方面，在某些实现方式中，方法还包括：对数据块进行信道编码，得到编码后的比特序列；从编码后的比特序列中，选择第一比特序列，第一比特序列对应L个时域符号；在N个时域单元中发送数据块，包括：在第一时域单元上发送第二比特序列，第二比特序列在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续，其中，第二比特序列为第一比特序列中的部分比特序列。
基于上述技术方案，在第一时域单元上进行数据块的一次重复发送时，如果第一时域单元上用于发送数据块的可用的时域符号不连续，或者说存在不可用的时域符号，可以仅保留可用的时域符号上对应的比特序列，从而可以只对可用的时域符号上的数据信息(即可用于传输数据块的时域符号上的数据信息)进行编码，可以保证较好的信道编码增益。
结合第一方面或第三方面，在某些实现方式中，将第一比特序列中，映射于第一时域符号上的比特序列删除，得到第二比特序列，第一时域符号为第一时域单元上不能用于传输数据块的时域符号。
示例地，第一时域符号可以包括一个或多个时域符号。
基于上述技术方案，通过直接将不可用时域符号上承载的比特序列打孔删除即可，实现方式简单，且可以只对可用的时域符号上的数据信息(即可用于传输数据块的时域符号上的数据信息)进行编码，能够尽可能保持较好的信道编码增益。
结合第一方面或第三方面，在某些实现方式中，第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，W个时域符号包括第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；在第一时域单元上发送数据块，包括：在第一段连续时域符号上发送数据块和第一解调参考信号DMRS，在第二段连续时域符号上发送数据块和第二DMRS；其中，第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置和第二DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置，根据W确定；或者，第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，第二DMRS在第 二段连续时域符号上的位置根据第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
也就是说，可以根据W共同确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置和第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置；或者，分别地，根据第一段连续时域符号的数量确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，根据第二段连续时域符号的数量确定第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置。
基于上述技术方案，当某时域单元(如第一时域单元)上的重复发送被不可用时域符号切断后，各段的DMRS配置，可以统一配置，也可以分段配置。例如，统一配置时，可以根据W共同确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置和第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，这种方式简单可行。又如，分段配置时，可以根据第一段连续时域符号的数量确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，根据第二段连续时域符号的数量确定第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，这种方式比较灵活。
结合第一方面或第三方面，在某些实现方式中，N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，第二时域单元为不发送数据块的时域单元，且数据块在N个时域单元中的发送次数为(N-M)，M为大于1或等于1、且小于N的整数。
示例地，在第二时域单元符合以下条件的情况下，不在第二时域单元上发送数据块：第二时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于或等于第一预设门限；或者，第二时域单元上用于传输数据块的不连续时域符号的总数目小于或等于第二预设门限。
结合第一方面或第三方面，在某些实现方式中，方法还包括：在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送数据块。
结合第一方面或第三方面，在某些实现方式中，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送数据块，直到在N个时域单元以及N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送数据块的时域符号的总数目达到N*L。
基于上述技术方案，当实际的重复发送占用的时域符号的数目没有达到配置的重复发送对应的时域符号的数目时，发送端设备可以在后续的至少一个时域单元上进行额外的重复发送，直到实际的重复发送数据块的时域符号的总数目达到N*L为止。从而可以保证重复发送数据块时实际占用的时域符号的数目，提高传输性能。
结合第一方面或第三方面，在某些实现方式中，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送数据块，直到在N个时域单元以及N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送数据块的总次数达到N，或者理解为，直到在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送数据块的次数等于M。
基于上述技术方案，当实际的重复发送次数没有达到配置的重复发送次数时，发送端设备可以在后续的至少一个时域单元上进行额外的重复发送，直到实际的重复发送次数达到配置的重复发送次数为止。从而可以保证重复发送的次数，提高传输性能。
结合第一方面或第三方面，在某些实现方式中，所述至少一个时域单元为M个时域单元。
示例地，M个时域单元上可以按照重复typeA的形式进行M次重复发送。
示例地，M个时域单元上，发送数据块的次数小于或等于M。
基于上述技术方案，在N个时域单元之后的时域单元上进行重复发送时，可以按照现 有协议中对重复type A的要求，判断能否在时域单元上进行重复发送。关于重复type A，下文详细描述。
结合第一方面或第三方面，在某些实现方式中，数据块在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上所占的时域符号数为M*L。
示例地，至少一个时域单元上可以按照重复typeB的形式进行重复发送。
基于上述技术方案，在N个时域单元之后的时域单元上进行重复发送时，可以按照现有协议中对重复type B的要求，直到实际的重复发送次数达到配置的重复发送次数。关于重复type B，下文详细描述。
第四方面，提供了一种接收数据的方法。该方法可以由接收端设备(如网络设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于接收端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：发送指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收数据块，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L；其中，L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限。
应理解，任何可以表征一个数据块对应的时域符号数目的参数或者参数范围都可以用来判断是否在时域单元上进行该数据块的一次重复发送。例如，可以使用码率来判断是否在时域单元上进行一次重复发送。
示例地，数据块在第一时域单元上传输时的实际码率小于或等于第一预设码率。
结合第二方面或第四方面，在某些实现方式中，第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，W个时域符号包括第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；在第一时域单元上接收数据块，包括：在第一段连续时域符号上接收数据块和第一解调参考信号DMRS，在第二段连续时域符号上接收数据块和第二DMRS；其中，第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置和第二DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置，根据W确定；或者，第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，第二DMRS在第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
也就是说，可以根据W共同确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置和第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置；或者，分别地，根据第一段连续时域符号的数量确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，根据第二段连续时域符号的数量确定第二段连续 时域符号上的DMRS的位置。
基于上述技术方案，当某时域单元(如第一时域单元)上的重复发送被不可用时域符号切断后，各段的DMRS配置，可以统一配置，也可以分段配置。例如，统一配置时，可以根据W共同确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置和第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，这种方式简单可行。又如，分段配置时，可以根据第一段连续时域符号的数量确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，根据第二段连续时域符号的数量确定第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，这种方式比较灵活。
结合第二方面或第四方面，在某些实现方式中，N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，第二时域单元为不接收数据块的时域单元，且在N个时域单元中的接收数据块的次数为(N-M)，M为大于1或等于1、且小于N的整数。
结合第二方面或第四方面，在某些实现方式中，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收数据块。
结合第二方面或第四方面，在某些实现方式中，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收数据块，直到在N个时域单元以及N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收数据块的时域符号的总数目达到N*L。
结合第二方面或第四方面，在某些实现方式中，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收数据块，直到在N个时域单元以及N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收数据块的总次数达到N，或者理解为，直到在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收数据块的次数为M。
结合第二方面或第四方面，在某些实现方式中，所述至少一个时域单元为M个时域单元。
示例地，M个时域单元上可以按照重复typeA的形式进行M次重复发送。
示例地，M个时域单元上，接收数据块的次数小于或等于M。
基于上述技术方案，N个时域单元之后的M个时域单元上的重复发送可以是重复typeA的形式。或者说，在N个时域单元之后的M个时域单元上进行数据块的接收时，可以按照现有协议中对重复type A的要求，判断能否在该时域单元上进行数据块的接收。关于重复type A，下文详细描述。
结合第二方面或第四方面，在某些实现方式中，数据块在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上所占的时域符号数为M*L。
示例地，至少一个时域单元上可以按照重复typeB的形式进行重复发送。
基于上述技术方案，在N个时域单元之后的时域单元上进行重复发送时，可以按照现有协议中对重复type B的要求，直到实际的重复发送次数达到配置的重复发送次数。关于重复type B，下文详细描述。
第五方面，提供了一种发送数据的方法。该方法可以由发送端设备(如终端设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于发送端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上发送一个数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块，其中，第一时域单元满足以下条件：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L’，且连续时域符号的起始位置不为S’；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数 据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L’，且大于或等于第三预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L’；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L’，且大于或等于第四预设门限；或者，第一时域单元用于传输数据块时的实际码率小于或等于第一预设码率；其中，L’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上的传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
或者，该方法可以包括：接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上发送同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目为Q，第一时域单元满足以下条件：Q大于L’或等于L’，且第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的起始位置不为S’；或者，Q个时域符号连续，Q大于或等于第三预设门限、且Q小于L’；或者，Q个时域符号不连续，Q大于或等于第四预设门限、且Q小于L’；其中，L’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上的传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
第六方面，提供了一种接收数据的方法。该方法可以由接收端设备(如网络设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于接收端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：发送指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上发送一个数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收数据块，第一时域单元满足以下条件：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L’，且连续时域符号的起始位置不为S’；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L’，且大于或等于第三预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L’；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L’，且大于或等于第四预设门限；其中，L’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上的传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
或者，该方法可以包括：发送指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上发送同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收数据块，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目为Q，第一时域单元上的Q个时域符号满足以下条件：Q大于L’或等于L’，且第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的起始位置不为S’；或者，Q个时域符号连续，Q大于或等于第三预设门限、且Q小于L’；或者，Q个时域符号不连续，Q大于或等于第四预设门限、且Q小于L’；其中，L’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上的传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
应理解，任何可以表征一个数据块对应的时域符号数目的参数或者参数范围，都可以用来判断是否在时域单元上进行该数据块的发送。
基于上述技术方案，在N个时域单元上发送一个数据块(如PUSCH)，基于配置的每个时域单元上的数据发送的起始时域符号位置S’和持续可用的时域符号的数目L’，发 送设备在N个时域单元上进行该数据块的发送。当N个时域单元中的任一时域单元的可用时域资源位置不完全满足配置的S’和L’的要求时，可以按照第一方面和第二方面的条件判断该时域单元上是否可用于该数据块的发送。例如，在有些时域单元上，只要该时域单元满足一定条件，就可以使用该时域单元进行数据块发送。以第一时域单元为例，只要第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号满足一定的条件，发送端设备均可以使用该第一时域单元进行该数据块的发送，相应地，接收端设备可以在该第一时域单元上接收到数据块。本申请实施例提供的发送方案，对用于发送的时域单元的要求更加灵活，可以适用更多的通信场景，能够充分利用时域资源，改善上行发送的性能。
结合第五方面或第六方面，在某些实现方式中，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S’；数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L’。
基于上述技术方案，在多个时域单元上发送某一数据块(如PUSCH)时，发送端设备在多个时域单元上的发送所占据的时域资源(如时域符号)的位置，可以与配置的在任一时域单元上的重复发送的时域资源的位置不完全相同。例如，在有些时域单元上可以按照配置的在任一时域单元上的发送的时域符号位置进行发送，如按照配置的S’和L’进行发送；在有些时域单元上，可以根据该时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的数目，确定该时域单元是否用于发送数据块，用于提高资源的利用率。
结合第五方面或第六方面，在某些实现方式中，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：预定义的，或者，网络设备指示的。
示例地，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置的信息，可以承载于高层信令中，也可以承载于下行控制信息中。
结合第五方面或第六方面，在某些实现方式中，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的第一个时域符号。
第七方面，提供了一种发送数据的方法。该方法可以由发送端设备(如终端设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于发送端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上发送一个数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S’；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L’；其中，L’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上的传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
基于上述技术方案，在N个时域单元上发送一个数据块(如PUSCH)，基于配置的每个时域单元可用于发送该数据块的起始时域符号位置S’和持续可用的时域符号的数目L’，发送端设备在N个时域单元上发送该数据块。当N个时域单元中的任一时域单元的可用时域符号位置不完全满足配置的S’和L’的要求时，可以判断该时域单元是否可用于数据块的发送，如可以按照第三方面的条件判断该时域单元是否可用于数据块的发送。例如，在有些时域单元上(如第一时域单元)可以按照该时域单元的具体情况确定数据块所 占的时域符号，不按照配置的发送的时域符号位置进行发送，如不按照配置的S’和/或不按照配置的L’进行发送。如可以参考可用于传输数据块的时域符号的位置，来确定数据块所占的时域符号。本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案，对用于重复发送的时域单元的要求更加灵活，可以适用更多的通信场景，能够尽可能地保证利用可用于传输的时域资源，提高发送性能。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：在第一时域单元满足以下条件的情况下，确定在第一时域单元上发送该数据块：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L’；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L’，且大于或等于第三预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L’；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L’，且大于或等于第四预设门限。
应理解，任何可以表征一个数据块对应的时域符号数目的参数或者参数范围都可以用来判断是否在时域单元上进行该数据块的一次重复发送。
第八方面，提供了一种接收数据的方法。该方法可以由接收端设备(如网络设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于接收端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：发送指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上发送一个数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收数据块，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S’；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L’；其中，L’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上的传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
结合第八方面，在第八方面的某些实现方式中，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L’；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L’，且大于或等于第三预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L’；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L’，且大于或等于第四预设门限。
第九方面，提供了一种发送数据的方法。该方法可以由发送端设备(如终端设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于发送端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：接收指示信息，该指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中实际的重复发送数据块的次数小于N的情况下，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次数据块，M为大于1或等于1的整数。
示例地，数据块在N个时域单元中的发送次数为(N-M)。
示例地，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次数据块，直到实际的重复发送次数达到配置的重复发送次数为止。
示例地，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次数据块，直到在N个 时域单元以及N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送数据块的时域符号的总数目达到N*L。
示例地，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次数据块时，可以按照上述第一方面所述的方法，判断是否在时域单元上进行一次重复发送。
基于上述技术方案，当实际的重复发送占用的时域符号的数目没有达到配置的重复发送对应的时域符号的数目时，发送端设备可以在后续的至少一个时域单元上进行额外的重复发送，直到实际的重复发送数据块的时域符号的总数目达到N*L为止。从而可以保证重复发送数据块时实际占用的时域符号的数目，提高传输性能。
结合第九方面，在第九方面的某些实现方式中，所述至少一个时域单元为M个时域单元。
示例地，M个时域单元上可以按照重复typeA的形式进行M次重复发送。
示例地，M个时域单元上，发送数据块的次数小于或等于M。
结合第九方面，在第九方面的某些实现方式中，数据块在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上所占的时域符号数为M*L。
示例地，至少一个时域单元上可以按照重复typeB的形式进行重复发送。
第十方面，提供了一种接收数据的方法。该方法可以由接收端设备(如网络设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于接收端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：发送指示信息，该指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中实际的接收数据块的次数小于N的情况下，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收M次数据块，M为大于1或等于1的整数。
示例地，数据块在N个时域单元中的接收次数为(N-M)。
示例地，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收M次数据块，直到实际的重复接收次数达到配置的重复接收次数为止。
示例地，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收M次数据块，直到在N个时域单元以及N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收数据块的时域符号的总数目达到N*L。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，至少一个时域单元为M个时域单元。
示例地，M个时域单元上可以按照重复typeA的形式进行M次重复发送。
示例地，M个时域单元上，接收数据块的次数小于或等于M。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，数据块在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上所占的时域符号数为M*L。
示例地，至少一个时域单元上可以按照重复typeB的形式进行重复发送。
第十一方面，提供了一种发送数据的方法。该方法可以由发送端设备(如终端设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于发送端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示重复发送多次同一数据块；对数据块进行信道编码，得到编码后的比特序列；从编码后的比特序列中，选择第一比特序列，第一比特序列对应L个时域符号，L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目；在第一时域单元上发送第二比特序列，第二比特序列在第一时域单元上占据的时域符号不 连续，其中，第二比特序列为第一比特序列中的部分比特序列。
基于上述技术方案，在时域单元上进行数据块的一次重复发送时，如果该时域单元上用于发送数据块的可用的时域符号不连续，或者说存在不可用的时域符号，可以仅保留可用的时域符号上承载的比特序列，从而可以保证较好的信道编码增益。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的某些实现方式中，在第一时域单元上发送第二比特序列之前，方法还包括：将第一比特序列中，映射于第一时域符号上的比特序列删除，得到第二比特序列，第一时域符号为第一时域单元上不能用于传输数据块的时域符号。
第十二方面，提供了一种发送数据的方法。该方法可以由发送端设备(如终端设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于发送端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示重复发送多次同一数据块；在第一时域单元上的第一段连续时域符号发送数据块和第一DMRS；在第一时域单元上的第二段连续时域符号发送数据块和第二DMRS；其中，第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置和第二DMRS在第二段连续时域符号上的位置，共同根据W确定；或者，分别地，第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，第二DMRS在第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
基于上述技术方案，当某时域单元(如第一时域单元)上的重复发送被不可用时域符号切断后，对于该时域单元上进行的重复发送，各段的DMRS配置，可以统一配置，也可以分段配置。例如，统一配置时，可以根据W共同确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置和第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，这种方式简单可行。又如，分段配置时，可以根据第一段连续时域符号的数量确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，根据第二段连续时域符号的数量确定第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，这种方式比较灵活。
第十三方面，提供了一种接收数据的方法。该方法可以由接收端设备(如网络设备)执行，或者，也可以由配置于接收端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该方法可以包括：发送指示信息，指示信息用于指示重复发送多次同一数据块；在第一时域单元上的第一段连续时域符号接收数据块和第一DMRS；在第一时域单元上的第二段连续时域符号接收数据块和第二DMRS；其中，第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置和第二DMRS在第二段连续时域符号上的位置，共同根据W确定；或者，分别地，第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，第二DMRS在第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
第十四方面，提供一种通信装置，用于执行上述各方面中任一种可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该装置包括用于执行上述各方面中任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。
第十五方面，提供了另一种通信装置，包括处理器，该处理器与存储器耦合，可用于 执行存储器中的指令，以实现上述第一方面至第十三方面中任一种可能的实现方式中的方法。该存储器可以为处理器内部的片内存储单元，还可以为与存储器耦合连接的位于处理外部的片外存储单元。在一种可能的实现方式中，该装置还包括存储器。在一种可能的实现方式中，该装置还包括通信接口，处理器与通信接口耦合。
一种可能的设计，该通信装置可以是发送端设备(例如终端设备)，也可以是配置于发送端设备中的芯片或电路或处理系统，或者也可以是包括发送端设备的设备。
在一种实现方式中，该装置为发送端设备或包括发送端设备的设备。当该装置为发送端设备或包括发送端设备的设备时，该通信接口可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口。可选地，所述收发器可以为收发电路。
在另一种实现方式中，该装置为配置于发送端设备中的芯片。当该装置为配置于发送端设备中的芯片时，该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。
又一种可能的设计，该通信装置可以是接收端设备(例如网络设备)，也可以是配置于接收端设备中的芯片或电路或处理系统，或者也可以是包括接收端设备的设备。
在一种实现方式中，该装置为接收端设备或包括接收端设备的设备。当该装置为接收端设备或包括接收端设备的设备时，该通信接口可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口。可选地，所述收发器可以为收发电路。
在另一种实现方式中，该装置为配置于接收端设备中的芯片。当该装置为配置于接收端设备中的芯片时，该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。
第十六方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被装置执行时，使得所述装置实现上述各方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十七方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述指令被计算机执行时使得信装置实现上述各方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十八方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括至少一个前述的发送端设备和至少一个前述的接收端设备，如终端设备和网络设备。
附图说明
图1是适用于本申请实施例的通信系统的示意图。
图2示出了type A的重复发送的一示意图。
图3示出了type A的重复发送的又一示意图。
图4示出了type A的重复发送的又一示意图。
图5示出了type A的重复发送的又一示意图。
图6示出了type B的重复发送的示意图。
图7示出了适用于本申请实施例的数据块处理的示意图。
图8示出了重复发送时RV cycling进行比特选择的示意图。
图9示出了根据本申请一实施例提供的发送数据的方法的示意图。
图10至图18示出了适用于本申请一实施例的数据块所占时域单元的示意图。
图19示出了根据本申请又一实施例提供的发送数据的方法的示意图。
图20示出了根据本申请另一实施例提供的发送数据的方法的示意图。
图21示出了适用于本申请另一实施例的比特选择的示意图。
图22示出了根据本申请再一实施例提供的发送数据的方法的示意图。
图23和图24示出了适用于本申请另一实施例的DMRS配置的示意图。
图25至图26示出了适用于本申请实施例的一个数据块所占时域单元的示意图。
图27是根据本申请一实施例提供的通信装置的示意图。
图28是根据本申请又一实施例提供的通信装置的示意图。
图29是适用于本申请实施例的终端设备的示意图。
图30是适用于本申请实施例的网络设备的示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：第五代(5th generation，5G)系统或新无线(new radio，NR)、长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system，UMTS)等。此外，本申请实施例的技术方案还可以应用于侧链路通信。例如，本申请实施例的技术方案还可以应用于：设备到设备(device to device，D2D)通信，机器到机器(machine to machine，M2M)通信，机器类型通信(machine type communication，MTC)，以及车联网系统中的通信。
为便于理解本申请实施例，首先结合图1说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。
图1是适用于本申请实施例的无线通信系统100的一示意图。如1图所示，该无线通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备，例如图1所示的网络设备111，该无线通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备，例如图1所示的终端设备121。网络设备和终端设备均可配置多个天线，网络设备与终端设备可使用多天线技术通信。
其中，网络设备和终端设备通信时，网络设备可以管理一个或多个小区，一个小区中可以有整数个终端设备。可选地，网络设备111和终端设备121组成一个单小区通信系统，不失一般性，将小区记为小区#1。网络设备111可以是小区#1中的网络设备，或者说，网络设备111可以为小区#1中的终端设备(例如终端设备121)服务。
需要说明的是，小区可以理解为网络设备的无线信号覆盖范围内的区域。
本申请实施例中提到的发送端设备可以为终端设备，接收端设备可以为网络设备。例如，发送端设备为终端设备121，接收端设备为网络设备111。
应理解，上述图1仅是示例性说明，本申请并未限定于此。例如，本申请实施例还可以应用于需要重复发送数据(或者说数据块)的任何通信场景。
还应理解，该无线通信系统中的网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。该设备包括但不限于：演进型节点B(evolved Node B，eNB)、无线网络控制器(Radio Network Controller，RNC)、节点B(Node B，NB)、基站控制器(Base Station Controller，BSC)、基站收发台(Base Transceiver Station，BTS)、家庭基站(例如，Home evolved NodeB，或Home Node B，HNB)、基带单元(BaseBand Unit，BBU)，无线保真(Wireless Fidelity， WIFI)系统中的接入点(Access Point，AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point，TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point，TRP)等，还可以为5G，如，NR，系统中的gNB，或，传输点(TRP或TP)，5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板，或者，还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点，如基带单元(BBU)，或，分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)等。
在一些部署中，gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit，CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit，简称AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能，DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如，CU负责处理非实时协议和服务，实现无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)，分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务，实现无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)层和物理(physical，PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息，或者，由PHY层的信息转变而来，因而，在这种架构下，高层信令，如RRC层信令，也可以认为是由DU发送的，或者，由DU+AAU发送的。可以理解的是，网络设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外，可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network，RAN)中的网络设备，也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network，CN)中的网络设备，本申请对此不做限定。
还应理解，该无线通信系统中的终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment，UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。本申请的实施例中的终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。本申请的实施例对应用场景不做限定。
为便于理解本申请实施例，下面首先结合本申请中涉及的几个术语进行简单介绍。
1、解调参考信号
解调参考信号为用于进行数据解调的参考信号。解调参考信号可以为LTE协议或NR协议中的解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DMRS)，或者也可以为未来协议中定义的其他用于实现相同功能的参考信号。在LTE或NR协议中，DMRS可以承载在物理共享信道中与数据块信号一起发送，以用于对衰落信道进行信道估计，进而完成对物理共享信道中承载的数据块信号进行解调。如，在物理下行共享信道(physical downlink share channel，PDSCH)中与下行数据块一起发送，或者，在物理上行共享信道(physical uplink share channel，PUSCH)中与上行数据块一起发送。在本申请实施例中，解调参考信号可包括通过物理上行共享信道发送的解调参考信号。
PDSCH或者PUSCH在时域上的映射方式可包括第一映射方式和第二映射方式，其中，第一映射方式可以为NR协议中的映射类型A(mapping type A)，第二映射方式可以为NR协议中的映射类型B(mapping type A)。在通常情况下，PDSCH或者PUSCH 的映射方式可通过高层信令指示，例如，无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令。
对于映射类型A，按照现有协议，被调度的物理上行共享信道(或物理下行共享信道)的时域符号的起始位置是一个slot中的第一个时域符号。对于映射类型B，被调度的物理上行共享信道(或物理下行共享信道)的时域符号的起始位置是一个slot中的任意一个时域符号。
解调参考信号的时域位置可以相对于被调度的物理上行共享信道(或物理下行共享信道)的起始时域符号的位置和时域符号的长度确定。其中，时域符号的长度也可以理解为时域符号的总数目。
对于PUSCH(或者PDSCH)资源映射类型A，首个解调参考信号的符号位置l 0(即，前载解调参考信号(front-loaded DMRS)的首个符号位置)可以被配置为被调度的PUSCH(或者PDSCH)的第3个符号或第4个符号，即l 0＝2或3。
对于PUSCH(或者PDSCH)资源映射类型B，首个解调参考信号的符号位置l 0(即，前载解调参考信号的首个符号位置)为被调度的PUSCH(或者PDSCH)的首个符号，即l 0＝0。
解调参考信号可包括前载解调参考信号和附加解调参考信号。
其中，对于一个数据块的一次传输，一般均会配置前载解调参考信号，在时域上占用一个符号或多个符号，若占用多个符号，则该多个符号在时域上连续。
附加(additional)解调参考信号：对于一个数据块的一次传输，附加解调参考信号的配置与否根据一个数据块一次传输的长度确定。若配置附加解调参考信号，则发送端在前载解调参考信号之后采用相同的序列生成的解调参考信号为附加解调参考信号。附加解调参考信号可以是前载解调参考信号所占用的符号之后的一个或多个符号，且前载解调参考信号占用的符号中的末个与附加解调参考信号占用的符号中的首个符号不连续。附加解调参考信号可以通过高层信令，例如RRC信令，配置资源。附加解调参考信号是一种可选的解调参考信号。
现有协议中PUSCH type B重复中DMRS配置的表格，如表1所示。应理解，表1仅是一种示例地说明，对此不作限定。例如，在未来协议中，重新定义的用于解调PDSCH的DMRS的映射类型为B的DMRS配置的方案，都适用于本申请实施例。
表1
Figure PCTCN2021072274-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021072274-appb-000002
其中，dmrs-AdditionalPosition，表示additional DMRS的位置。PUSCH mapping type A表示PUSCH映射类型为type A。PUSCH mapping type B表示PUSCH映射类型为type B。
2、时隙(slot)
一种slot的格式可以为包含若干个正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号。例如，一个slot的格式可以包括14个OFDM符号，或者，一种slot的格式可以为包含12个OFDM符号；或者，一种slot的格式为包含7个OFDM符号。一个slot中的OFDM符号可以全用于上行传输；可以全用于下行传输；也可以一部分用于下行传输，一部分用于上行传输，一部分灵活时域符号(可以灵活的配置为用于上行或者下行传输)。应理解，以上举例仅为示例性说明，不应对本申请构成任何限定。出于系统前向兼容性考虑，slot包含的OFDM符号的数目以及slot用于上行传输和/或下行传输不限于以上示例。本申请中，时域符号可以为OFDM符号，即时域符号可以替换为OFDM符号。
3、时域单元
一个时域单元(也可称为时间单元)可以是一个时域符号或者几个时域符号，或者一个迷你时隙(mini-slot)，或者一个slot，或者一个子帧(subframe)，其中，一个子帧在时域上的持续时间可以是1毫秒(ms)，一个slot可以由7个或者14个时域符号组成，一个mini-slot可以包括至少一个时域符号(例如，2个时域符号或7个时域符号或者14个时域符号，或者小于等于14个时域符号的任意数目符号)。列举的上述时域单元大小仅仅是为了方便理解本申请的方案，不应理解对本申请的限定，可以理解的是，上述时域单元大小可以为其它值，本申请不做限定。
在本申请实施例中，时域符号和符号有时交替使用，其表示相同的含义。以时域单元为slot为例，一个slot可以包括2个符号或7个符号或者14个符号，或者小于等于14个符号的任意数目符号，或者也可以表示为，一个slot可以包括2个时域符号或7个时域符号或者14个时域符号，或者小于等于14个时域符号的任意数目符号。
4、类型A(type A)和类型B(type B)的重复发送
如前所述，在一些场景下，如一些深覆盖场景，如小区边沿，或者地下室等，无线信号传播的路径损耗非常严重。为了改善上行传输性能，一种增强覆盖性能的方法是重复发送数据块。例如，终端设备重复发送PUSCH，网络设备对重复发送的数据块进行合并检测。通过该方式可以提升信道估计性能，提升数据解调性能，从而提升小区覆盖能力。
以当前的NR协议为例，在当前的NR协议中支持对PUSCH最大16次的重复发送，支持对PUCCH最大8次的重复发送。当前NR协议对PUCCH支持type A的重复发送，对PUSCH支持type A和type B的重复发送。
(1)type A的重复发送
type A的重复发送，指的是：N次重复需要调度连续的N个slot，配置一次重复发送在一个slot中需要占用的时域符号的起始位置和总长度，N个slot中，满足一次重复发送占据的时域符号的起始位置和总长度与配置的起始位置和总长度相同的slot，可以实际用于一次重复发送。其中，N为大于或等于1的整数。如图2所示，假设配置了4次重复发送，且每次重复发送占据一个slot上的第2至第10个时域符号，那么需要满足每一个slot的重复均需要在各个slot的第2至第10个时域符号上。
此外，按照当前协议规定，当某一个slot中的时域符号不满足上述type A的重复发送的要求(即需要保证从第S个时域符号开始的连续L个时域符号为时域符号)，则取消在当前slot上的重复发送。
由上可知，type A的重复发送是基于slot的重复。采用type A的重复发送方式时，对当前slot上用于重复发送的起始时域符号的位置S和连续持续长度L都需要满足要求，才能用于重复发送，否则该slot不能用于进行重复发送。
采用type A的重复发送方式时，当N次重复需要占据连续的N个slot中含有不可用于上行传输/重复传输的slot时，由于不可用slot的存在，可能导致实际的重复发送次数少于配置的重复发送次数。例如，假设每次重复发送占据一个slot上的第1至第L个时域符号(即在每个slot中一共占L个时域符号)。如果一个slot中有很多用于上行发送的时域符号，但不是从第1个时域(即S＝0)开始；或者，从S＝0第1个时域符号开始只有L-1个时域符号等情况，该slot无法用于重复发送，由于该slot上的重复发送被取消，实际重复传输的次数小于网络设备配置的重复传输的次数，从而影响接收端的合并增益，例如，无法达到期望的接收信噪比而导致信道估计和解调译码的准确性下降，影响上行发送的性能。
一示例，如图3所示，假设配置了4次重复发送，且每次重复发送占据一个slot上的第1至第10个时域符号。由于第2个slot中用于上行发送的时域符号从第3个时域开始，因此该第2个slot上的重复发送被取消，即实际传输的次数为3。
又一示例，如图4所示，假设配置了4次重复发送，且每次重复发送占据一个slot上的第1至第10个时域符号。由于第2个slot中用于上行发送的时域符号只有8个，或者，第2个slot中用于上行发送的时域符号只有8个、且S不为0，因此该第2个slot上的重复发送被取消，即实际传输的次数为3。
又一示例，如图5所示，假设配置了4次重复发送，且每次重复发送占据一个slot上的第1至第10个时域符号。第2个slot用于上行发送的时域符号满足S为0，且数量大于等于10，由于第2个slot上用于上行发送的时域符号被不可用于上行发送的时域符号切分为第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，此时，两段时域符号均不满足大于等于L个，因此该第2个slot上的重复发送被取消，即实际传输的次数为3。
(2)type B的重复发送
type B的重复发送，指示是：N次重复发送，依据第1次重复发送的起始时域符号位置S，按照每次重复需要占据的时域符号数目L，在连续的多个时域符号上进行重复发送。即从调度的第一个slot的第S个时域符号开始，后续的N*L个时域符号(可能会到延伸到其他的slot上)均用于N次重复发送。
如图6所示，对于情况1，假设当前配置了2次重复发送，且每次重复发送占用4个 时域符号时，那么会在连续的8个时域符号上完成2次重复发送。对于情况2，假设当前配置了4次重复发送，且每次重复发送占用4个时域符号时，那么会在连续的16个时域符号上完成4次重复发送。对于情况3，假设当前配置了1次重复，且一次重复需要占用14个时域符号时，那么会在连续的14个时域符号上完成1次重复发送。
按照当前的协议规定，跨slot边界的1次重复发送，会按照slot边界所在位置拆分成2次实际重复发送，每次实际重复发送的传输块大小(transport block size，TBS)保持不变。从图6可知，可以看到在情况2和情况3的重复发送中，连续调度的N*L个时域符号跨slot边界。也就是说，在情况2的重复发送中，原本的第3次传输被认为是第3次和第4次传输；在情况3的重复发送中，假设一个slot包括10个符号，配置的第1次原本重复发送(norminal repetition)被切分为是第1次和第2次实际重复发送(actual repetition)。配置的原本重复发送，即表示配置的重复发送，或者说名义重复发送。下文为方便描述，将配置的原本重复发送，简称为配置的重复发送。
应理解，关于type A和type B的重复发送的具体描述可以参考现有的协议，其对本申请实施例的保护范围不造成限定。
由上可知，采用type A的重复发送方式时，由于存在对传输slot的要求，可能存在不可用于重复传输的slot，导致实际的重复发送次数少于配置的重复发送次数(如图3至图5所示的示例)，从而影响上行发送的性能；采用type B的重复发送方式时，可能导致一次传输被slot边界或者不可用的时域符号切分成两次传输，而切分之后的两次实际重复发送所传输的数据(包括信息比特和校验比特)和未被切分的一次重复发送所传输的数据(包括信息比特和校验比特)不同，从而影响接收端的合并译码性能。有鉴于此，本申请实施例提供一种方式，可以提高重复发送的性能，增强接收端的合并增益，改善上行传输的性能。
下文为方便描述，将type A的重复发送方式记为重复type A(repetition type A)，将type B的重复发送方式记为重复type B(repetition type B)。
5、冗余版本(redundancy version，RV)
信息比特串在通过物理天线发出去之前，一般会经历一些信号处理过程，如图7所示。
信道编码：通过对信息比特串中引入冗余和校验比特，使得信号在到达接收端之后，接收端能够依据收到的多个比特(包括信息比特和校验比特)彼此之间的校验关系，能够较好的恢复出信息比特串。对于数据信道而言，目前NR可以支持低密度奇偶校验码(low density parity check code，LDPC)的信道编码。例如，对于100比特(bit)的信息比特串，通过1/5编码码率的LDPC编码，变成了500bit的编码后比特串，引入了400bit的冗余，信息比特串和编码后比特串长度的比值等于编码码率1/5。为区分，将编码后的比特串记为编码后比特串。
速率匹配：信息比特串传输经过信道编码得到较长的编码后比特串之后，并不是直接将所有的编码后比特串都发出去。一般地，终端设备可以按照网络设备指示给终端配置的可用的资源元素(resource element，RE)个数及调制阶数来确定能够发送多少比特，进而从编码后比特串中进行选择(当前协议规定了4个起点，近似均匀的分布在编码后比特串中，分别标记为RV0，RV1，RV2，RV3)。
例如，当前1个资源块(resource block，RB)中的可用RE数目＝12*12＝144，采用正 交相移键控(quadrature phase shift keying，QPSK)调制，则1个物理资源块(physical resource block，PRB)中能够承载144*2＝288bit。因此，需要从500比特的编码后比特串中选择出288比特，作为选择出的比特串，然后对该选择出的比特串进行调制和资源映射等处理。此时，对应的传输码率＝信息比特串/选择出的比特串长度＝100/288。
按照当前的协议规定，在重复发送时，无论是采用重复type A还是采用重复type B，每次传输按照预先定义的顺序，从编码后比特串中进行选择。
例如：预先预定的传输顺序是{RV0，RV2，RV3，RV1}。如图8所示，4次重复发送，分别从编码后比特串的RV0的位置进行选择一定长度的比特进行传输、从编码后比特串的RV2的位置进行选择一定长度的比特进行传输、从编码后比特串的RV3的位置进行选择一定长度的比特进行传输、从编码后比特串的RV1的位置进行选择一定长度的比特进行传输。通过RV循环(RV cycling)的形式传输不同的RV对应的比特串，有助于增强接收机检测性能。
以重复type A和重复type B为例。
在图2所示的重复type A中，依据RV cycling进行发送，4个slot上的4次重复发送分别从相同TBS编码后比特串的RV0、RV2、RV3、RV1的位置进行选择和发送。
在图6所示的重复type B中，按照当前的协议规定，跨slot边界的1次重复被时隙边界(slot boundary)拆分为2次实际重复发送之后，按照实际重复发送进行RV cycling。例如，在图6的情况2中，第3次重复发送因为跨slot边界，被切分为两次实际重复发送，分别为第3次实际重复发送和第4次实际重复发送，此时原先的第4次重复为第5次实际重复发送。假设多次重复发送按照{RV0，RV2，RV3，RV1}进行编号循环，则5次实际重复发送分别采用的RV编号为{RV0，RV2，RV3，RV1，RV0}，即切分之后的第3次实际重复发送和第4次实际重复发送对应的RV编号是RV3和RV1。在图6的情况3中，1次重复发送因为跨slot边界被切分为两次实际重复发送，切分之后的每次传输依然保持TBS不变，但依然会进行RV循环。
由上可知，按照当前的RV cycling的方式，采用重复type B时，如果一次重复遇上slot边界被切分为2次actual repetition之后，会进行RV cycling。这样，两次actual repetition选择的bit传输之间可能会有间隔，而间隔处的bit很难被发送出去，因此导致接收机侧的合并译码性能变差。
有鉴于此，本申请实施例提供一种方法，可以提高重复发送的性能，增强接收端的合并增益，改善上行传输的性能。
下面将结合附图详细说明本申请提供的各个实施例。
下文实施例中，用一些字母表示不同的含义。为便于理解，这里对本申请中涉及的几个字母统一说明。其中，用L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目，或者说L表示为数据块配置的单次传输的时域符号的数目，或者说L表示为数据块的一次重复发送配置的时域符号的数目。用S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置，或者说S表示为数据块配置的单次传输的起始时域符号的位置，或者说S表示为数据块的一次重复发送配置的起始时域符号的位置。用K表示第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目，或者说K表示第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续的可用时域符号的数目。用K’表示第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目，或者说K’ 表示第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的可用时域符号的总数目。
此外，下文实施例中，多次提到重复发送或者重复发送数据块，对此本领域技术人员应理解其含义。重复发送或者重复发送数据块，其均用于表示对于某一数据，要发送一次或者多次。本申请实施例对每次发送的内容是否完全相同，不作限定。例如，在实际通信中，每次发送的RV可能是不同的。另，在本申请中，“数据块”均可以替换为“传输块”或者“数据”，或者在未来协议中，用于表示相同或相似含义的命名，都适用于本申请实施例。
图9是本申请实施例提供的一种发送数据的方法900的示意性交互图。方法900可以包括如下步骤。
910，发送端设备接收指示信息，该指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数。
920，发送端设备在第一时域单元上发送数据块，其中，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L。
下文主要以发送端设备为终端设备，接收端设备为网络设备，重复发送的数据块为PUSCH，时域单元上的时域资源为时域符号为例进行示例性说明。
在本申请实施例中，重复发送某一数据块(如PUSCH)时，N次重复发送需要占据N个时域单元，在每个时域单元上进行1次重复发送。发送端设备在时域单元上的重复发送所占据的时域资源(如时域符号)的位置，可以与配置的一次重复发送的时域资源的位置不完全相同。例如，在有些时域单元上可以按照配置的一次重复发送的时域符号位置进行发送，如按照配置的S和L进行发送；在有些时域单元上，只要该时域单元满足一定条件，就可以使用该时域单元进行数据块的一次重复发送。本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案，对用于重复发送的时域单元的要求更加灵活，可以适用更多的通信场景，能够尽可能地保证重复发送次数，减小出现实际重复发送次数小于配置的重复发送次数的发生的概率，提高发送性能。
可选地，该N个时域单元为连续的时域单元。也就是说，重复发送N次数据块(如PUSCH)时，N次重复发送占据连续的N个时域单元，在每个时域单元上进行1次重复发送，并且在每个时域单元上的重复发送所占据的时域符号不完全相同。
数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号，至少可以包括以下一种或者多种情况。
情况1，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S。
在该情况1下，数据块在多个时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置可以不完全相同。相比于重复type A，本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案放宽了对起始时域符号的位置的要求。
下文主要以时域单元为slot，数据块为PUSCH为例进行说明。
假设配置4次重复发送，S为每个slot的第1个符号。
如图10所示，PUSCH在4个slot上分别发送了一次，为区分，将该4个slot分别记为第1个slot、第2个slot、第3个slot、第4个slot。PUSCH在第1次发送中所占的时域资源为第1个slot上的时域符号，且PUSCH在该第1个slot上的起始时域符号的位置为第1个符号。PUSCH在第2次发送中所占的时域资源为第2个slot上的时域符号，且 PUSCH在该第2个slot上的起始时域符号的位置为第3个符号。PUSCH在第3次发送中所占的时域资源为第3个slot上的时域符号，且PUSCH在该第3个slot上的起始时域符号的位置为第1个符号。PUSCH在第4次发送中所占的时域资源为第4个slot上的时域符号，且PUSCH在该第4个slot上的起始时域符号的位置为第1个符号。由图10所示的示例可知，数据块在第2个slot上所占的起始时域符号的位置不为S。
情况2，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L。
在该情况2下，数据块在多个时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目可以不完全相同。相比于重复type A，本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案放宽了对连续时域符号的数目的要求。
下文主要以时域单元为slot，数据块为PUSCH为例进行说明。
假设配置4次重复发送，L为10个符号。
如图11所示，PUSCH在4个slot上分别发送了一次。PUSCH在第1次发送中所占的时域资源为第1个slot上的时域符号，且PUSCH在该第1个slot上所占的时长为10符号。PUSCH在第2次发送中所占的时域资源为第2个slot上的时域符号，且PUSCH在该第2个slot上所占的时长为12符号。PUSCH在第3次发送中所占的时域资源为第3个slot上的时域符号，且PUSCH在该第3个slot上所占的时长为10符号。PUSCH在第4次发送中所占的时域资源为第4个slot上的时域符号，且PUSCH在该第4个slot上所占的时长为10符号。由图11所示的示例可知，数据块在第2个slot上所占的连续时域符号的数目不是L。
应理解，图11仅是示例性说明，对此不作限定。例如，数据块在某些时域单元上所占的连续时域符号的数目可能小于L。
情况3，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续。
在该情况3下，当时域单元满足一定条件，如时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号的数目满足一定条件时，即使该时域单元上能用于发送数据块的时域符号不连续，发送端设备也可以在该时域单元上进行数据块的一次重复发送。相比于重复type A，本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案放宽了对时域符号必须连续的要求。
上文结合情况1至情况3，列举了基于本申请实施例，数据块在时域单元上所占的时域资源的可能情况。可以理解，与重复type A中数据块在N个时域单元的位置需要完全一致，否则取消传输(如图3至图5所示的示例)的重复发送方案相比，本申请实施例中，即使数据块在各个时域单元上所占的时域资源不完全相同，也可以继续使用该时域单元发送数据块。
可选地，发送端设备可以基于一些条件，判断时域单元是否为可用的(available)，即是否要在该时域单元上进行数据块的一次重复发送。
以第一时域单元为例，在第一时域单元满足以下任意一项条件时，发送端设备可以在第一时域单元上进行数据块的一次重复发送。
条件1，第一时域单元上能用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L。
如前所述，用K表示第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目，或者说K表示第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续的可用时域符号的数目。基于条件1，只要K大于或等于L，那么该第一时域单元为可用的时域单元，发送端设备可以在该第一 时域单元上进行数据块的一次重复发送。
下文主要以时域单元为slot，数据块为PUSCH为例进行说明。
假设配置4次重复发送，为数据块的一次重复发送所配置的起始时域符号的位置S为每个slot的第1个时域符号，为数据块的一次重复发送所配置的时域符号的数目L为10个时域符号。
示例地，如图10至图14所示。在第2个slot上的连续时域符号数目为12，大于配置的单次重复发送需要的时域符号数目10。因此，该第2个slot满足条件1，可以在该第2个slot上进行重复发送。或者说，可以将该第2个slot判定为可用时隙(available slot)，即可以在该slot上发送一次PUSCH。
一可能的情况，K＝L，如图10所示。在该情况下，可以在K个连续的时域符号上发送一次PUSCH。
又一可能的情况，K>L，如图11至图14所示。在该情况下，一种可能的方式，可以在K个连续的时域符号上发送一次PUSCH，如图11所示。在第2次重复发送中，可以占用第2个slot中的连续的所有时域符号(即12个时域符号)。又一种可能的方式，可以在K个连续的时域符号中的L个时域符号上发送一次PUSCH，如图12至图14所示。当在K个连续的时域符号中的L个时域符号上进行一次重复发送时，起始时域符号的位置可以为第X个时域符号，X为大于1或等于1，且小于K或等于K的整数。
例如，可以选择靠前的时域符号。如图12所示，在第二次重复发送中，可以选择12个连续的时域符号中的第一个时域符号作为起始时域符号，在靠前的连续10个时域符号上发送PUSCH。
又如，可以选择靠后的时域符号。如图13所示，在第二次重复发送中，可以选择靠后的连续10个时域符号上发送PUSCH。
又如，可以选择中间的时域符号。如图14所示，在第二次重复发送中，可以选择12个连续的时域符号中的第2个时域符号作为起始时域符号，在连续10个时域符号上发送PUSCH。
应理解，上述图10至图14仅是为便于理解的示例性说明。基于条件1，只要第一时域单元上能用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L，发送端设备可以使用该第一时域单元重复发送数据块。数据块在该第一时域单元上所占的时域符号可以如图10至图14所示，或者也可以是其他形式，对此不作限定。可选地，关于数据块在该第一时域单元上所占的时域符号，可以是预定义的，如协议预先定义的或者网络设备预先定义的；或者也可以是网络设备指示给终端设备的，对此也不作限定。
条件2，第一时域单元上能用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限。
基于条件2，只要K大于或等于第一预设门限，那么该第一时域单元为可用的时域单元，发送端设备可以在第一时域单元上进行一次重复发送。
其中，第一预设门限的具体取值以及具体确定方式不作限定。例如，第一预设门限的取值可以是预定义的，如协议预先定义的或者网络设备预先定义的或者预先约定的，例如取值为4。或者第一预设门限的取值也可以是网络设备配置并指示给终端设备的。或者，第一预设门限的取值也可以是根据历史通信情况估计的经验值。或者，第一预设门限的取 值也可以是考虑到DMRS所占的时域符号确定的值。或者，第一预设门限的取值是基于配置的一次重复发送的时域符号数目L确定的，例如第一预设门限值为L乘以一个比例系数，该比例系数可以是预定义或者网络设备指示的。
下文主要以时域单元为slot，数据块为PUSCH为例进行说明。
假设配置4次重复发送，S为每个slot的第1个符号，L为10个符号。假设第一预设门限值为5。
示例地，如图15和图16所示。在第2个slot上的连续时域符号数目K为8，大于第一预设门限值5。因此，该第2个slot满足条件2，可以在该第2个slot上进行重复发送。或者说，可以将该第2个slot判定为可用时隙(available slot)，即可以在该第2个slot上发送一次PUSCH。
一可能的情况，K小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限时，在K个连续的所有时域符号上进行一次重复发送。如图15或图16所示，在第2次重复发送中，可以占用第2个slot中的连续的所有时域符号(即8个时域符号)。
应理解，上述图15和图16仅是为便于理解做的示例性说明。基于条件2，只要第一时域单元上能用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于第一预设门限，那么该第一时域单元为可用的时域单元，发送端设备可以使用该第一时域单元重复发送数据块。数据块在该第一时域单元上所占的时域符号可以如图15或图16所示，或者也可以是其他形式，对此不作限定。
条件3，第一时域单元上能用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续，第一时域单元上能用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L。
为描述，用K’表示第一时域单元上能用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目。基于条件3，只要K’大于或等于L，发送端设备可以在该第一时域单元上进行数据块的一次重复发送。
下文主要以时域单元为slot，数据块为PUSCH为例进行说明。
假设配置4次重复发送，S为每个slot的第1个符号，L为10个符号。
示例地，如图17所示。在第2个slot上的时域符号总数目K’为12，大于配置的单次重复发送需要的时域符号数目10。因此，该第2个slot满足条件3，可以在该第2个slot上进行重复发送。或者说，可以将该第2个slot判定为可用时隙(available slot)，即可以在该第2个slot上发送一次PUSCH。
一种可能的方式，可以在K’个时域符号上发送一次PUSCH。如图17所示，在第2次重复发送中，可以占用第2个slot中的所有时域符号(即12个时域符号)。
应理解，上述图17仅是为便于理解做的示例性说明。基于条件3，只要第一时域单元上能用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L，那么该第一时域单元为可用的时域单元，发送端设备可以使用该第一时域单元重复发送数据块。数据块在该第一时域单元上所占的时域符号可以如图17所示，或者也可以是其他形式，如占用前L个时域符号或占用后L个时域符号，对此不作限定。
条件4，第一时域单元上能用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限。
基于条件4，只要K’大于或等于第二预设门限，发送端设备可以在第一时域单元上进 行数据块的一次重复发送。
其中，第二预设门限的具体取值以及具体确定方式不作限定。例如，第二预设门限的取值可以是预定义的，如协议预先定义的或者网络设备预先定义的或者预先约定的。或者第二预设门限的取值也可以是网络设备配置并指示给终端设备的。或者，第二预设门限的取值也可以是根据历史通信情况估计的经验值。或者，第二预设门限的取值也可以是考虑到用于解调数据块的DMRS所占的时域符号确定的值。或者，第二预设门限的取值是基于配置的一次重复发送的时域符号数目L确定的，例如第二预设门限值为L乘以一个比例系数，该比例系数可以是预定义或者网络设备指示的。
下文主要以时域单元为slot，数据块为PUSCH为例进行说明。
假设配置4次重复发送，S为每个slot的第1个符号，L为10个符号。假设第二预设门限值为6。
示例地，如图18所示。在第2个slot上的时域符号总数目K’为7，大于第二预设门限值6。因此，该第2个slot满足条件4，可以在该第2个slot上进行重复发送。或者说，可以将该第2个slot判定为可用时隙(available slot)，即可以在该第2个slot上发送一次PUSCH。
一可能的情况，K’小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限时，可以在K’个时域符号上进行一次重复发送。如图18所示，在第2次重复发送中，可以占用第2个slot中的所有时域符号(即7个时域符号)。
应理解，上述图18仅是为便于理解做的示例性说明。基于条件4，只要第一时域单元上能用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于第二预设门限，那么该第一时域单元为可用的时域单元，发送端设备可以使用该第一时域单元重复发送数据块。数据块在该第一时域单元上所占的时域符号可以如图18所示，或者也可以是其他形式，对此不作限定。
还应理解，上文条件1至条件4主要是从时域符号的数目或者数量的角度进行了描述。应理解，任何属于上述条件的变形，都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。例如，任何可以表征一个数据块对应的时域符号数目的参数或者参数范围都可以适用于本申请实施例，都可以用来判断是否在时域单元上进行该数据块的一次重复发送。例如，可以使用实际码率来判断是否在时域单元上进行一次重复发送，下面结合条件5示例性说明。
条件5，第一时域单元用于传输数据块时的实际码率小于或等于第一预设码率。
基于条件5，确定第一时域单元用于传输数据块时的实际码率，当该实际码率小于或等于第一预设码率，发送端设备可以在第一时域单元上进行数据块的一次重复发送。也就是说，当实际码率不会太高而影响译码性能时，则认为当前时域单元可以用于一次重复发送。
其中，第一预设码率的具体取值以及具体确定方式不作限定。例如，第一预设码率可以是预定义的，如协议预先定义的或者网络设备预先定义的或者预先约定的。或者第一预设码率也可以是网络设备配置并指示给终端设备的。
发送端设备确定第一时域单元用于传输数据块时的实际码率的方式可以参考现有方式，例如实际码率依据配置的一次重复发送的传输块大小和实际可用的时域符号数目来确定，对此不作限定。以发送端设备为终端设备为例，作为示例而非限定，下面列举一可能 的确定方式。
(1)网络设备向终端设备指示用于上行重复发送的码率。例如网络设备向终端设备发送调制与编码策略(modulation and coding scheme，MCS)的信息，指示终端设备用于上行重复传输的码率。具体地，例如，网络设备可以向终端设备发送指示信息，指示MCS的信息。
(2)终端设备根据相关配置信息，计算出一次重复发送的TBS。
(3)终端设备根据计算出的TBS，判断每个时域单元上的实际码率。例如，终端设备可以根据当前时域单元上可用于重复发送的实际可用时域符号上的所有的RE个数，以及终端设备依据一次重复发送的配置信息计算出的TBS，确定当前时域单元如果用于一次重复发送时的实际码率。
一般地，传输数据块使用的时域符号的数目越少，传输时的码率越高；传输数据块使用的时域符号的数目越多，传输时的码率越低。当计算出的当前时域单元如果用于一次重复发送的实际码率取值小于或等于第一预设码率，即实际码率不会太高，在该情况下，实际码率不会太高而影响译码性能，因此可以认为当前时域单元可以用于一次重复发送。
应理解，上述(1)-(3)仅是为便于理解做的编号，并不限定步骤执行的先后顺序。此外，任何可以使得发送端设备确定出实际码率的方式，都适用于本申请实施例。
下文主要以时域单元为slot，数据块为PUSCH为例进行说明。
一可能的方式，网络设备向终端设备发送MCS的信息，指示用于上行重复发送PUSCH的码率。终端设备根据相关配置信息，计算出一次重复发送的TBS。终端设备根据计算出的TBS，判断每个slot上的实际码率。例如，终端设备可以根据当前slot上可用于重复发送的所有的RE个数，并且终端设备依据重复发送的配置信息计算出的TBS，确定当前slot如果用于一次重复发送时的实际码率。当计算出的当前slot如果用于一次重复发送的实际码率取值小于或等于第一预设码率时，则认为当前slot可以用于一次重复发送。
上文结合条件1至条件5，列举了判断时域单元是否available，即是否要在该时域单元上进行数据块的一次重复发送的可能的条件。应理解，上述条件1至条件5仅是示例性说明，对此不作限定。此外，应理解，判断时域单元是否available只是一种确定性的描述，即判断在该时域单元上是否可以进行重复发送，判断将某个时间单元做available的标识的动作，可以不是必要动作。
只要相比于重复type A，放宽了在每个slot上用于重复发送资源的位置或数目的要求的条件，都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。例如，其他可以用来表征时域单元上时域符号的数目的方式，也适用于本申请实施例。
可选地，本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案，可以与重复type A和重复type B并存。例如，本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案可以记为重复type C(repetition type C)或者typeA的演进，等等。应理解，在未来协议中，用于表示本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案的任何命名都适用于本申请实施例。
作为示例而非限定，可以根据通信环境，判断使用哪种重复发送方案。如在用于重复发送的时域资源不充足时，可以使用本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案。作为示例而非限定，可以根据数据块的可靠性要求，判断使用哪种重复发送方案。如对于重复发送的数据块可靠性要求较高时，可以使用本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案。
上文结合图9至图18介绍了本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案。通过本申请实施例，原本按照现有协议不可用于数据块重复发送的时域单元(如slot)，可以按照一定的规则在该时域单元上的可用时域符号上进行重复发送。与重复type A相比，本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案中，放宽了对用于重复发送数据块的资源配置的约束，如只要时域单元满足上述条件1或条件2或条件3或条件4或条件5，该时域单元即可以用于进行重复发送。因此，本申请实施例提供的重复发送方案，使得能够尽可能的利用可用的时域资源(如时域符号资源)，进行重复发送的增强，改善上行传输的性能。
下面结合图19介绍本申请实施例提供的又一种重复发送方案。图19所示的方法1900可以与方法900结合使用，也可以单独使用，对此不作限定。
图19是本申请实施例提供的一种发送数据的方法1900的示意性交互图。方法1900可以包括如下步骤。
1910，发送端设备接收指示信息，该指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数。
1920，发送端设备在N个时域单元中实际的重复发送数据块的次数小于N的情况下，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次数据块，M为大于1或等于1的整数。
在本申请实施例中，当实际的重复发送次数没有达到配置的重复发送次数时，发送端设备可以在后续的至少一个时域单元上进行额外的重复发送。从而可以保证重复发送的次数，提高传输性能。
示例地，数据块在N个时域单元中的发送次数为(N-M)。当实际的重复发送次数没有达到配置的重复发送次数时，发送端设备可以在后续的时域单元上进行额外的重复发送，直到实际的重复发送次数达到配置的重复发送次数为止。
例如，以时域单元为slot，网络设备配置了4次重复发送次数，L＝10。如果在4个slot中(即N个时域单元中)，只有3个slot能够进行重复发送，如只有3个slot为可用时隙(available slot)，则实际的重复发送次数无法达到配置的4次。在该情况下，基于本申请实施例，发送端设备可以在这4个slot之后的其他slot上进行重复发送，即在后延slot上(即至少一个时域单元的一例)进行补充的重复发送，若后延的第一个slot可用，则在后延的第一个slot上进行额外的重复发送，若后延的第一个slot不可用，则继续后延，直至满足发送次数为止。
以时域单元为slot，至少一个时域单元为至少一个后延slot为例进行示例性说明。关于在至少一个时域单元上(如记为I个时域单元上，I为大于1或等于1的整数)补充的重复发送，至少可以采用以下任一方式。
方式1，在后延slot上进行重复发送时，可以按照现有协议中对重复type A的要求，判断能否在该slot上进行重复发送。
例如，当该slot上用于重复发送的起始时域符号的位置S和连续时域符号的数目L都满足要求的情况下，该slot才能用于重复发送。如果该slot上依然不能进行重复发送(即该slot不可用)则继续往后延，继续判断是否能够进行发送，直到实际的重复发送次数达到配置的重复发送次数。
为便于理解，列举一具体示例。例如，假设配置了8次重复发送，实际重复发送了4 次(即8次重复发送对应的调度的时域单元上实际的可用于重复发送的时域单元为4个)，那么还缺少4次重复发送，即M＝8-4＝4。假设数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目L＝7，S＝0，按照方式1，即按照重复type A的形式进行重复发送，那么I＝M＝4，即需要在后延的4个slot上进行补传，每个slot上进行一次重复发送，每一次重复发送需要满足typeA重复发送的S和L的要求。
基于方式1，M次数据块要在N个时域单元之后的至少M个时域单元上发送，其中，每个时域单元上进行一次重复发送，且每一次重复发送需要满足typeA重复发送的S和L的要求。在该方式1下，可能会出现一种情况，即当后延的M个slot中依然存在不可用于typeA重复发送的slot时，继续后延，也即实际往后延J个slot，J大于M。直到J个slot中可用于type A的重复发送的slot个数达到M，实现M次重复发送为止。
方式2，在后延slot上进行重复发送时，可以按照现有协议中对重复type B的要求进行重复发送。
也就是说，在后延的I个slot的起始时域符号开始，按照每次重复发送所占的时域符号数目为L，在连续的多个时域符号上进行重复发送，直到数据块在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次数据块所占的时域符号数为M*L。
关于起始时域符号的位置可以是预先定义的，或者也可以是单独配置的，对此不作限定。例如，起始时域符号的位置可以是该后延slot的第一个时域符号，也可以是该后延slot上第一个可用的时域符号，或者是其他位置。为便于理解，列举一具体示例。例如，假设配置了8次重复发送，实际重复发送了4次(即实际的重复发送次数为4)，那么还缺少4次重复发送，即M＝8-4＝4。假设数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目L＝7，那么一共需要4*7＝28个时域符号的资源。按照重复type B的形式进行重复发送，那么只要在I个slot上的进行重复发送占用的时域符号数目达到M*L。例如，每个slot上包括14个时域符号，I＝2、M＝4、L＝7，即在后延的2个slot上进行补传，每一个slot上可以进行2次重复发送，占满28个时域符号即可。也就是说，确保在后延的I个slot上的可用时域符号数目达到28个时域符号。在该方式下，关于I和M的具体大小关系，不作严格限定。
基于方式2，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上多次发送数据块，数据块在该至少一个时域单元上多次发送所占的时域符号的总数目为M*L，其中M表示重复发送中实际重复发送次数与配置的重复次数的差值，也可以理解为减少的重复发送的次数。关于具体所占的时域单元的数量或者说数目，不作严格限定。
方式3，按照方法900所示实施例的重复发送方式进行重复发送。
后延slot的重复，可以按照方法900所示实施例的方式，判断后延slot是否可以用于进行重复发送。例如，可以按照上述条件1至条件5中的任一条件判断，后延slot是否为可用时隙(available slot)。以条件1为例，当后延slot满足条件1时，则在该后延slot上进行重复发送，否则继续后延，直到实际的重复发送次数达到配置的重复发送次数，才停止重复继续后延。关于方式3的具体实现方式，可以参考方法900中的描述，此处不再赘述。
方式4，只往后延I个slot，在I个slot中可用的slot上进行typeA重复发送。其中，I的取值可以为预设值或者网络设备指示的值或者约定的值，对此不作限定。
一可能的实现方式，I＝M，也就是说，只往后延M个slot，在M个slot中可用的slot 上进行type重复发送。关于判断M个slot中哪些slot可用，有多种方式：
1)可以通过上述条件1至条件5中任一条件判断。即如果M个slot中的slot满足上述条件1至条件5中的任一个条件，那么该slot可以认为是可用slot，即在该slot上可以进行1次重复发送。
2)可以根据是否满足typeA重复发送的S和L的要求判断。即如果M个slot中的slot满足满足typeA重复发送的S和L的要求，那么该slot可以认为是可用slot，即在该slot上可以进行1次重复发送。在该情况下，M个slot中有多少可用于typeA重复发送的slot，就发送多少次。
3)可以同时结合1)和2)判断。即如果M个slot中的slot满足上述条件1至条件5中的任一个条件，那么该slot可以认为是可用slot，即在该slot上可以进行1次重复发送。如果M个slot中的slot满足typeA重复发送的S和L的要求，那么该slot也可以认为是可用slot，即也可以在该slot上可以进行1次重复发送。
方式5，在后延slot上进行重复发送时，直到在N个时域单元以及N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上实际发送的时域符号的总数目达到N*L。
关于方式5中的后延slot是否可用，可以基于上述方式4中的1)-3)判断。或者也可以直接按照现有协议中对重复type B的要求，在持续的L个时域符号内可用的时域符号进行重复发送，直到实际发送的时域符号数目达到N*L。
方式6，在后延slot上进行重复发送时，直到后延slot上总的时域符号数目达到M*L，该总的时域符号数可以包括不可用的时域符号。
例如，每个slot上包括14个时域符号，I＝2、M＝4、L＝7，即在后延的2个slot上进行补传，每一个slot上可以进行2次重复发送，占满28个时域符号即可。占用这2个slot上的28个时域符号中可用的时域符号进行重复发送，有可能这2个slot上可用于重复发送的时域符号数目少于28个。
方式7，在后延slot上进行重复发送时，直到在N个时域单元以及N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送数据块对应的时域符号总数目达到N*L，其中，该时域符号总数目可以包括：N个时域单元中数据块所占的时域符号的数目，以及N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上所有时域符号的数目(即其中可能包括不可用时域符号的数目)。
例如，N＝8、L＝7、M＝4，即一共需要8*7＝56个时域符号，且在后延slot上需要56-(4*7)＝28个时域符号。假设每个slot上包括14个时域符号，I＝2，即需要在后延的2个slot上进行补传，每一个slot上可以进行2次重复发送，占满28个时域符号即可。占用这2个slot上的28个时域符号中可用的时域符号进行重复发送，有可能这2个slot上可用于重复发送的时域符号数目少于28个。
上文结合方式1至方式7，示例性地列举了在后延slot上(即至少一个时域单元上)进行补充的重复发送的几种方式，对此不作限定。只要可以通过在后延slot上补充发送，使得实际的重复发送次数达到配置的重复发送次数的方案，都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。例如，在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次数据块，直到在N个时域单元以及N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上重复发送数据块的时域符号的总数目达到N*L。
方法1900所示的方案和方法900所示的方案可以单独使用，也可以结合使用。
作为示例而非限定，单独使用方法1900所示的方案时，发送端设备可以先基于type A重复发送的形式进行重复发送，或者，先type B重复发送的形式进行重复发送，在实际的重复发送次数没有达到配置的重复发送次数时，发送端设备可以采用方法1900所示的方案，在后延slot上进行补充的重复发送，直到实际的重复发送次数达到配置的重复发送次数。
作为示例而非限定，方法1900所示的方案和方法900所示的方案结合使用时，发送端设备可以先基于方法900所示的重复发送方式进行重复发送，在实际的重复发送次数没有达到配置的重复发送次数时，发送端设备可以进一步采用方法1900所示的方案，在后延slot上进行补充的重复发送，直到实际的重复发送次数达到配置的重复发送次数。例如，N个时域单元包括至少一个第二时域单元，该至少一个第二时域单元不满足上述条件1至条件5中的任何一个条件，那么该至少一个第二时域单元被认为是不可用的时域单元，故取消在该至少一个第二时域单元上的传输，因此可以在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上继续后延，直到实际的重复发送次数达到配置的重复发送次数。
上文结合图19介绍了又一重复发送方案。通过本申请实施例，考虑到可能出现实际的重复发送次数小于配置的重复发送次数的情况，故本申请实施例提出可以在后延时域单元上(如后延slot上)进行补充的重复发送，从而能够保证实际发送次数达到预期的配置的重复发送次数，有助于改善上行重复发送性能。
如上文所述，信息比特串传输经过信道编码得到较长的编码后比特串之后，并不是直接将所有的编码后比特串都发出去，而是要进行比特选择，即从编码后比特串中选择一定长度的比特，然后对该选择出的比特串进行调制和资源映射等处理。
在一些场景下，可能会出现一次重复发送被不可用时域符号切分成多段进行重复发送，如参考图17或图18所示的示例。有鉴于此，本申请实施例提出一种方法，可以尽可能地保证较好的信道编码增益。
图20是本申请实施例提供的一种发送数据的方法2000的示意性交互图。方法2000可以包括如下步骤。
2010，接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示重复发送多次同一数据块；
2020，对数据块进行信道编码，得到编码后的比特序列；
2030，从编码后的比特序列中，选择第一比特序列，第一比特序列对应L个时域符号，L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目；
2040，在第一时域单元上发送第二比特序列，第二比特序列在第一时域单元上占据的时域符号不连续，其中，第二比特序列为第一比特序列中的部分比特序列。
通过本申请实施例，在第一时域单元上进行数据块的一次重复发送时，如果第一时域单元上用于发送数据块的可用的时域符号不连续，或者说存在不可用的时域符号，可以仅保留可用的时域符号上承载的比特序列，从而可以保证较好的信道编码增益。
可选地，将第一比特序列中，映射于第一时域符号上的比特序列删除，得到第二比特序列，第一时域符号为第一时域单元上不能用于传输数据块的时域符号。第一时域符号可能包括1个或多个时域符号，对此不作限定。
应理解，关于第一比特序列对应L个时域符号，以及映射于第一时域符号上的比特序列，其均表示按照调度或者资源分配，对应的或者映射的时域符号。此处的对应或者映射 或者说关联，表示的是资源分配层面的映射，并不代表实际传输层面的映射。第一比特序列对应L个时域符号，即表示按照调度或者资源分配，第一比特序列原本要承载于L个时域符号上，然而在实际传输中，可能只发送第一比特序列中的部分比特序列，该部分比特序列承载于L个时域符号中的部分时域符号。例如，如图21所示，第一比特序列对应L个时域符号，即表示第一比特序列对应12个时域符号，即第一比特序列对应的12个时域符号包括：第一部分可用的5个时域符号、以及中间2个不可用时域符号、以及第二部分可用的5个时域符号。将第一比特序列中映射于第一时域符号上的比特序列删除，即表示将映射于中间2个不可用时域符号的比特序列删除。
下文主要以时域单元为slot，数据块为PUSCH为例，结合图21进行说明。
如图21所示，假设在某一个slot上原本用于一次重复的12个时域符号，有2个时域符号不可用，即图21中的“x”符号，从而导致一次重复被切断为2次重复。
如图21所示，信息比特在经过信道编码后得到编码后比特串。当按照12个可用时域符号进行速率匹配时(即没有不可用时域符号x)，假设从RV0位置进行速率匹配的比特选择，则对应12个时域符号选择出来的比特串为编码后比特串中的阴影部分所示(即第一比特序列可以如编码后比特串中的阴影部分所示，该第一比特序列对应12个时域符号)。其中，阴影部分比特序列(承载在12个时域符号上)，由图21所示的三部分组成：第一部分可用的时域符号上承载的比特序列、不可用的时域符号上原本承载的比特序列、第二部分可用的时域符号上承载的比特序列。
关于对于被切断之后的实际重复发送，从编码后比特串中的哪个位置开始选择比特进行速率匹配，本申请实施例提供一种方式，第二部分可用的时域符号上承载的比特序列不发生变化。即按照图21所示的虚线位置，将不可用的时域符号上承载的比特序列删除(如打孔删除)，第一部分可用的时域符号上承载的比特序列，以及第二部分可用的时域符号上承载的比特序列不发生变化。通过直接将不可用时域符号上承载的比特序列打孔删除即可，实现方式简单，且能够尽可能保持较好的信道编码增益。
可选地，当第一时域单元上还包括可用的时域符号时，该可用的时域符号上也可以承载比特序列。
应理解，上述仅是示例性说明，关于一次重复发送被不可用时域符号切分成多段进行重复发送的情况，还可以采用其他的比特选择方式。例如，被切断的多次传输采用相同的RV编号进行bit选择。又如，被切断的多次传输采用RV cycling的方式进行bit选择。
如前所述，在一些场景下，可能会出现一次重复发送被不可用时域符号切分成多段进行重复发送，关于各段在速率匹配的时候，可以按照相同RV编号，也可以按照不同的RV编号。
假设多次重复发送按照{RV0，RV2，RV3，RV1}进行编号循环。
一示例，以图17中的第二个时域单元(即第2次重复对应的时域单元)为例，图17中第二个slot中的配置的第2次重复发送被切成了3段实际的重复发送。
一可能的方式，在速率匹配的时候，采用相同RV编号。也就是说，配置的第2次重复发送包含的至少两段实际的重复发送均采用相同的RV编号，例如RV2，那么配置的第3次重复发送包采用的RV编号为RV3。也就是说，在图17所示的配置的4次重复发送分别采用的RV编号为{RV0，{RV2，RV2，RV2}，RV3，RV1}，其中{RV2，RV2，RV2} 分别对应配置的第2次重复发送包含的3段实际的重复发送的RV编号。
又一种可能的方式，在速率匹配的时候，采用不同RV编号。也就是说，配置的第2次重复包含的至少两段实际的重复发送采用不同的RV编号，例如配置的第2次重复发送的三段实际的重复发送分别采用的RV编号为：{RV2，RV3，RV1}，那么配置的第3次重复发送采用的RV编号为RV0。也就是说，在图17所示的配置的4次重复发送分别采用的RV编号为{RV0，{RV2，RV3，RV1}，RV0，RV2}，其中{RV2，RV3，RV1}分别对应配置的第2次重复包含的3段实际的重复发送的RV编号。
又一示例，以图18中的第二个时域单元(即第2次重复对应的时域单元)为例，图18中的配置的第2次重复被切成了2段实际的重复发送。
一可能的方式，在速率匹配的时候，采用相同RV编号。也就是说，配置的第2次重复包含的至少两段实际的重复发送均采用相同的RV编号，例如RV2，那么配置的第3次重复发送采用的RV编号为RV3。也就是说，在图18所示的配置的4次重复发送分别采用的RV编号为{RV0，{RV2，RV2}，RV3，RV1}，其中{RV2，RV2}分别对应于配置的第2次重复包含的2段实际的重复发送的RV编号。
又一种可能的方式，在速率匹配的时候，采用不同RV编号。也就是说，配置的第2次重复包含的至少一段实际的重复发送采用不同的RV编号，例如配置的第2次重复发送的两段分别采用的RV编号为：{RV2，RV3}，那么配置的第3次重复发送采用的RV编号为RV1。也就是说，在图18所示的配置的4次重复发送分别采用的RV编号为{RV0，{RV2，RV3}，RV1，RV0}，其中{RV2，RV3}分别对应于配置的第2次重复包含的2段实际的重复发送的RV编号。
上述主要结合图17和图18所示的示例，说明了一次配置的重复发送被不可用时域符号或者slot边界切分成多段进行实际重复发送时，各段在速率匹配的时候，可以按照相同RV编号，也可以按照不同的RV编号。应理解，上述仅是示例性说明，属于上述方案的变形，都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。例如，一次重复发送被不可用时域符号切分成多段进行重复发送时，各段在速率匹配的时候，部分采用相同RV编号，部分采用不同的RV编号，对此不作严格限定。
上文列举的方法2000的方案，可以与方法900的方案结合使用，也可以单独使用，对此不作限定。例如，方法2000的方案与方法900的方案结合使用时，如果出现数据块在一个时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续的情况，可以采用方法2000所示的方案进行bit选择。
上文结合图20至图21介绍了关于比特选择的方案。通过本申请实施例，当某时域单元(如某slot)上的重复发送被不可用时域符号切断后，各段传输的RV起点的选择，可以删除或打掉不可用时域符号对应的编码后比特串中的比特序列(如按照打孔的形式删除)。本申请实施例提供了一次重复发送被切断后的比特选择的方案，有助于增强接收端的合并增益。
在数据传输中，DMRS可以承载在物理共享信道中与数据信号一起发送，以用于对物理共享信道中承载的数据信号进行解调。在一些场景下，可能会出现一次重复发送被不可用时域符号切分成多段进行重复发送，如参考图17或图18所示的示例。在这些场景下，关于DMRS的配置，本申请实施例提出一种方法，实现一次重复发送被切换后的DMRS 配置。
图22是本申请实施例提供的一种发送数据的方法2200的示意性交互图。方法2200可以包括如下步骤。
2210，发送端设备接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示重复发送多次同一数据块；
2220，在第一时域单元上的第一段连续时域符号发送数据块和第一DMRS；
2230，在第一时域单元上的第二段连续时域符号发送数据块和第二DMRS；其中，第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置和第二DMRS在第二段连续时域符号上的位置，共同根据W确定；或者，分别地，第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，第二DMRS在第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
也就是说，可以根据W确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置和第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置；或者，根据第一段连续时域符号的数量确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，根据第二段连续时域符号的数量确定第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置。
应理解，W表示的是，时域单元上第一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目。
例如，以图17中的第二个时域单元(即配置的第2次重复发送对应的时域单元)为例，W为12，即从第一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号(即第1个时域符号)开始到最后一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号(即最后一个时域符号)的总数目。对于图17中的第二个时域单元，包括三段连续时域符号，每段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，可以根据W个时域符号的数目(即12)确定，或者，根据各段时域符号的数目分别确定。
又如，以图18中的第二个时域单元为例，W为9，即从第一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号(即第1个时域符号)开始到最后一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号(即第9个时域符号)的总数目。对于图18中的第二个时域单元，包括两段连续时域符号，每段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，可以根据W个时域符号的数目(即9)确定，或者，根据各段时域符号的数目分别确定。
又如，以图21中的时域单元为例，W为12，即从第一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号(即第1个时域符号)开始到最后一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号(即最后一个时域符号)的总数目。对于图21中的第二个时域单元，包括两段连续时域符号，每段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，可以根据W个时域符号的数目(即12)确定，或者，根据各段时域符号的数目分别确定。
下面详细介绍上述两种情况。
情况A，根据W配置DMRS。
基于情况A，可以根据W共同确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置和第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置。
以时域单元为slot，数据块为PUSCH为例。slot上的DMRS依据重复type A的方式配置DMRS，保留可用时域符号上的DMRS。某一段连续时域符号不存在DMRS时，则 在该段连续时域符号上的第一个时域符号上配置DMRS，或者，在该段连续时域符号上的最后一个时域符号上配置DMRS，或者，在该段连续时域符号上的中间某一个时域符号上配置DMRS。
如图23所示，S为每个slot的第1个符号，L为10个符号，即S＝0，L＝12。假设，配置的DMRS参数为单个DMRS(single DMRS)，且additional DMRS＝pos2。其中，additional DMRS＝pos2，表示最多还能够配置2个附加DMRS。按照现有协议中用于解调PUSCH的DMRS的映射类型为A的DMRS配置可知，在编号为l 0,6,9的三个时域符号上配置DMRS，即分别在第l 0+1个时域符号上、第7个时域符号上、第10个时域符号上配置DMRS。当配置的l 0＝2时(l 0＝2或3)，在如图23所示的时域符号上配置为DMRS。考虑到实际第6个时域符号和第7个时域符号不可用，故可以将第7个时域符号上的DMRS去掉，保留其他可用时域符号上的DMRS。
情况B，根据各段连续时域符号的数目配置DMRS。
基于情况B，分别地，根据第一段连续时域符号的数量确定第一段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置，根据第二段连续时域符号的数量确定第二段连续时域符号上的DMRS的位置。
例如，各段连续符号的第一个时域符号作为起始时域符号，并按照各段连续符号长度从预定义表格中进行选择。以时域单元为slot，数据块为PUSCH为例，预定义的表格可以如表1所示。假设l 0＝0，l d＝每段可用的连续时域符号数目。
同样假设配置的DMRS参数为single DMRS(即maxlength＝single)，且additional DMRS＝pos2。图24示出了第一段连续时域符号(即第一段时域符号)和第二段连续时域符号(即第二段时域符号)上DMRS的位置。
具体地，对于第一段连续时域符号中的DMRS，l d＝5，l 0＝0，依据表1中type B的DMRS资源配置可知，在编号为l 0,4的两个时域符号上配置DMRS，即分别在第l 0+1个时域符号上、第5个时域符号上配置DMRS。类似地，对于第二段连续时域符号中的DMRS，l d＝5，l 0＝0，依据表1中type B的DMRS资源配置可知，在编号为l 0,4的两个时域符号上配置DMRS，即分别在第l 0+1个时域符号上、第5个时域符号上配置DMRS。
上文结合图22至图24介绍了关于DMRS配置的方案。本申请实施例提供了一次重复发送被切断后的DMRS配置的方案，使能了各段的DMRS配置方式和信道估计。具体地，当某时域单元(如某slot)上的重复发送被不可用时域符号切断后，各段的DMRS配置，可以统一配置，也可以分段配置。此外，在统一配置时，如果存在一个或多个DMRS位于不可用时域符号上，可以删除或打掉不可用时域符号上的DMRS。
应理解，在上述一些实施例中，数据块均可替换为PUSCH或者传输块或者数据，发送端设备可以替换为终端设备。
还应理解，在上述一些实施例中，以数据块为PUSCH例进行描述，但这并不对本申请造成限定，任何重复发送的数据块均适用于本申请实施例。
还应理解，在上述一些实施例中，主要列举了上行数据的重复发送，关于下行接收也可以使用本申请方案。一示例，网络设备指示终端设备进行可用时隙(available slot)的判断，终端设备对下行typeA重复发送进行判断，并在可用时隙(available slot)资源上进行下行重复发送的数据的接收，并进行解调和译码。又一示例，终端设备接收网络设备 发送的指示信息，该指示信息用于指示终端设备进行下行数据的接收，然后终端设备可以使用上述条件1至条件5判断在哪些时域单元上可以接收数据。
还应理解，在上述一些实施例中，主要以等于预设门限表示符合条件为例进行了示例性说明。关于等于预设门限的情况，不作严格限定。以K与第一预设门限为例进行示例性说明。例如，K等于第一预设门限时，可以认为该时域单元为可用的时域单元，发送端设备可以在该时域单元上进行一次重复发送。又如，K等于第一预设门限时，可以认为该时域单元为不可用的时域单元，发送端设备取消在该时域单元上的重复发送。或者，K等于第一预设门限，也可以有其他的含义，对此不作限定。
还应理解，在上述一些实施例中，多次提及实际的重复发送次数，其表示发送端设备实际发送数据块的次数，或者说重复发送数据块的真实次数或实际次数。
还应理解，在上述一些实施例中，多次提及可用于传输数据块的时域符号，应理解，其表示能够或者可以用来传输数据块的时域符号。例如，对于灵活时域符号，其也可以或者说也能够用来传输数据块。
本文中描述的各个实施例可以为独立的方案，也可以根据内在逻辑进行组合，这些方案都落入本申请的保护范围中。例如，上述方法900、方法1900、方法2000、方法2200，均可以单独使用，也可以相互结合使用。
此外，应理解，上述主要以在N个时域单元上重复发送同一数据块为例进行示例性说明，对此不作限定。只要是采用了多个时域单元来发送一个数据块，即一个数据块的发送占用的时域资源包含了多个时域单元，均适用于本申请实施例。也就是说，任何使用本申请的方案，或者属于上述方案的变形方案，都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。例如，当在N个时域单元上发送一个数据块时，也可以使用本申请的方案。下面简单的进行介绍，未详细描述的内容可以参考上文的描述。
为区分，L’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上传输所配置的时域符号的数目，或者说L’表示为数据块配置的单个时域单元上传输的时域符号的数目。S’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置，或者说S’表示为数据块配置的单个时域单元传输的起始时域符号的位置。
假设，为发送端设备配置L’、S’，以及时域单元的数目N，配置的N个时域单元中，每个时域单元上用于传输该数据块的时域符号的位置和数目都相同。以一个时域单元为一个slot为例，即为该数据块配置了N个slot，发送端设备在N个slot上进行该数据块的发送，且该数据块在每个slot上传输所配置的时域符号的数目为L’，该数据块在每个slot上的传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置为S’。
根据本申请实施例，当N个时域单元上的某个时域单元不满足L’和/或S’的条件时，如果该时域单元满足一些条件，那么该时域单元也可以用于该数据块的传输。
一示例，该时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的起始位置不为S’，如果该连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L’，那么该时域单元可以用于该数据块的传输。
又一示例，该时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L’，如果该连续时域符号的数目大于或等于第三预设门限，那么该时域单元可以用于该数据块的传输。
其中，第三预设门限的具体取值以及具体确定方式不作限定。例如，第三预设门限的取值可以是预定义的，如协议预先定义的或者网络设备和终端设备预先约定的。或者第三 预设门限的取值也可以是网络设备配置并指示给终端设备的。或者，第三预设门限的取值也可以是根据历史通信情况估计的经验值。或者，第三预设门限的取值也可以是基于配置的一个时域单元上发送的时域符号数目L’确定的，例如第三预设门限值为L’乘以一个比例系数，该比例系数可以是预定义或者网络设备指示的。
又一示例，该时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续，如果该时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L’，那么该时域单元可以用于该数据块的传输。
又一示例，该时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续，该时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L’，如果该时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于第四预设门限，那么该时域单元可以用于该数据块的传输。
其中，第四预设门限的具体取值以及具体确定方式不作限定。例如，第四预设门限的取值可以是预定义的，如协议预先定义的或者网络设备和终端设备预先约定的。或者第四预设门限的取值也可以是网络设备配置并指示给终端设备的。或者，第四预设门限的取值也可以是根据历史通信情况估计的经验值。或者，第四预设门限的取值也可以是基于配置的一个时域单元上发送的时域符号数目L’确定的，例如第四预设门限值为L’乘以一个比例系数，该比例系数可以是预定义或者网络设备指示的。
通过上述方案，提供在多个时域单元上发送一个数据块的资源映射方案，通过放宽在每个时域单元上用于发送数据块的资源的位置或数目的要求的条件，可以改善传输的性能，提高资源的利用率。
为便于理解，以时域单元为slot，数据块为PUSCH为例进行说明。
假设配置4个slot发送PUSCH，S’为每个slot的第1个符号，L’为12个符号。假设第三预设门限值为6。结合图25和图26进行说明。
例如，如图25所示，在第3个slot上的连续时域符号数目为10，大于第三预设门限值6。因此，该第3个slot满足条件，可以在该第3个slot可以用于PUSCH传输。或者说，可以将该第3个slot判定为可用时隙(available slot)，即可以在该第3个slot上发送该PUSCH。应理解，图25中第3个slot中部分时域符号用于传输探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)仅是示例性说明，其不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。
又如，如图26所示，第3个slot为S子帧，即一部分时域符号用于下行传输，一部分时域符号用于上行传输，一部分为灵活(flexible)时域符号。如图26所示，第3个slot中，前面的6个时域符号为下行时域符号，中间的4个时域符号为切换的灵活时域符号，最后的4个时域符号为上行时域符号。该第3个slot不满足起始时域符号位置的要求(即S’为每个slot的第1个符号)，然而该第3个slot上的灵活时域符号和上行时域符号可以用于上行传输，即用于上行传输的时域符号数目可以达到8，满足大于第三预设门限值6。因此，该第3个slot满足条件，可以在该第3个slot可以用于PUSCH传输。或者说，可以将该第3个slot判定为可用时隙(available slot)，即可以在该第3个slot上发送该PUSCH。
应理解，上述图25和图26仅是用于说明某些时域单元满足一定条件的情况下，也可以用于PUSCH传输，至于在实际传输时占多少时域符号，对此不作限定。例如，以图26为例，在实际传输中，可以占部分灵活时域符号(如与上行时域符号相邻的2个时域符号)以及全部上行时域符号，或者也可以占全部灵活时域符号以及全部上行时域符号(即一共 8个时域符号)，等等，对此不作限定。
还应理解，上述仅是简单的说明，具体的可以参考上文条件1至条件4的描述，也就是说，上述条件1至条件4的方案也可以适用于在N个时域单元上发送一个数据块的情况，此处不再赘述。
可以理解的是，上述各个方法实施例中，由发送端设备(如终端设备)实现的方法和操作，也可以由可用于终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现，由接收端设备(如网络设备)实现的方法和操作，也可以由可用于网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现。
以上，结合图1至图26详细说明了本申请实施例提供的方法。以下，结合图27至图30详细说明本申请实施例提供的通信装置。应理解，装置实施例的描述与方法实施例的描述相互对应，因此，未详细描述的内容可以参见上文方法实施例，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是，各个网元，例如发送端设备或者接收端设备，为了实现上述功能，其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对发送端设备或者接收端设备进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面以采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块为例进行说明。
图27是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。该通信装置2700包括收发单元2710和处理单元2720。收发单元2710可以实现相应的通信功能，处理单元2720用于进行数据处理。收发单元2710还可以称为通信接口或通信单元。
可选地，该通信装置2700还可以包括存储单元，该存储单元可以用于存储指令和/或数据，处理单元2720可以读取存储单元中的指令和/或数据，以使得通信装置实现前述方法实施例。
该通信装置2700可以用于执行上文方法实施例中发送端设备(如终端设备)所执行的动作，这时，该通信装置2700可以为发送端设备或者可配置于发送端设的部件，收发单元2710用于执行上文方法实施例中发送端设备侧的收发相关的操作，处理单元2720用于执行上文方法实施例中发送端设备侧的处理相关的操作。
或者，该通信装置2700可以用于执行上文方法实施例中接收端设备(如网络设备)所执行的动作，这时，该通信装置2700可以为接收端设备或者可配置于接收端设备的部件，收发单元2710用于执行上文方法实施例中接收端设备侧的收发相关的操作，处理单元2720用于执行上文方法实施例中接收端设备侧的处理相关的操作。
作为一种设计，该通信装置2700用于执行上文方法实施例中发送端设备(如终端设 备)所执行的动作。
一种可能的实现方式，收发单元2710用于：接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块，其中，第一时域单元满足以下条件：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L，且连续时域符号的起始位置不为S，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限；或者，第一时域单元用于传输数据块时的实际码率小于或等于第一预设码率；其中，L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目。
示例地，收发单元2710可以包括接收单元和发送单元，接收单元用于接收指示信息，发送单元用于在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块。
可选地，处理单元2720用于：确定第一时域单元是否满足上述条件。
作为一示例，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S；数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L；其中，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
作为又一示例，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：预定义的，或者，网络设备指示的。
作为又一示例，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的第一个时域符号。
又一种可能的实现方式，收发单元2710用于：接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L；其中，L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
示例地，收发单元2710可以包括接收单元和发送单元，接收单元用于接收指示信息，发送单元用于在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块。
可选地，处理单元2720用于：确定第一时域单元满足以下条件：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限。
作为一示例，处理单元2720用于：对数据块进行信道编码，得到编码后的比特序列；从编码后的比特序列中，选择第一比特序列，第一比特序列对应L个时域符号；收发单元2710具体用于：在第一时域单元上发送第二比特序列，第二比特序列在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续，其中，第二比特序列为第一比特序列中的部分比特序列。
作为又一示例，处理单元2720还用于：将第一比特序列中，原本承载于第一时域单元上的不能用于传输数据块的时域符号上的比特序列删除。
作为又一示例，第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，W个时域符号包括第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；收发单元2710具体用于：在第一段连续时域符号上发送数据块和第一解调参考信号DMRS，在第二段连续时域符号上发送数据块和第二DMRS；其中，第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置和第二DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置，根据W确定；或者，第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，第二DMRS在第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
作为又一示例，N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，第二时域单元为不发送数据块的时域单元，且数据块在N个时域单元中的发送次数为(N-M)，M为大于1或等于1、且小于N的整数。
作为又一示例，收发单元2710还用于：在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次数据块。
作为又一示例，收发单元2710具体用于：在N个时域单元之后的M个时域单元上发送M次数据块，每个时域单元上发送一次数据块。
作为又一示例，收发单元2710具体用于：在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上的起始时域符号开始，按照每次重复发送数据块所占的时域符号数目为L，在连续的多个时域符号上进行重复发送数据块，直到数据块在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次数据块所占的时域符号数为M*L。
又一种可能的实现方式，收发单元2710用于：接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上发送一个数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块，其中，第一时域单元满足以下条件：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L’，且连续时域符号的起始位置不为S’；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L’，且大于或等于第三预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L’；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L’，且大于或等于第四预设门限；或者，第一时域单元用于传输数据块时的实际码率小于或等于第一预设码率；其中，L’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上的传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
示例地，收发单元2710可以包括接收单元和发送单元，接收单元用于接收指示信息， 发送单元用于在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块。
可选地，处理单元2720用于：确定第一时域单元是否满足上述条件。
作为一示例，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S’；数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L’。
作为又一示例，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：预定义的，或者，网络设备指示的。
作为又一示例，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的第一个时域符号。
又一种可能的实现方式，收发单元2710用于：接收指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上发送一个数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S’；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L’；其中，L’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上的传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
示例地，收发单元2710可以包括接收单元和发送单元，接收单元用于接收指示信息，发送单元用于在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送数据块。
作为一示例，在第一时域单元满足以下条件的情况下，收发单元2710确定在第一时域单元上发送该数据块：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L’；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L’，且大于或等于第三预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L’；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L’，且大于或等于第四预设门限。
该通信装置2700可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法实施例中的发送端设备(如终端设备)执行的步骤或者流程，该通信装置2700可以包括用于执行图9至图26中的发送端设备(如终端设备)执行的方法的单元。并且，该通信装置2700中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图9至图26中的方法实施例的相应流程。
其中，当该通信装置2700用于执行图9中的方法900时，收发单元2710可用于执行方法900中的步骤910和920；处理单元2720可用于执行方法900中的处理步骤，如判断时域单元是否符合条件。
当该通信装置2700用于执行图19中的方法1900时，收发单元2710可用于执行方法1900中的步骤1910和1920；处理单元2720可用于执行方法1900中的处理步骤，如判断用于补传数据块的时域单元。
当该通信装置2700用于执行图20中的方法2000时，收发单元2710可用于执行方法2000中的步骤2010和2040；处理单元2720可用于执行方法2000中的步骤2020和2030。
当该通信装置2700用于执行图22中的方法2200时，收发单元2710可用于执行方法2200中的步骤2210、2220、2230；处理单元2720可用于执行方法2200中的处理步骤。
应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
作为另一种设计，通信装置2700用于执行上文方法实施例中接收端设备(如网络设备)所执行的动作。
一种可能的实现方式，收发单元2710用于：发送指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收数据块，第一时域单元满足以下条件：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L，且连续时域符号的起始位置不为S，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限；其中，L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目。
示例地，收发单元2710可以包括接收单元和发送单元，发送单元用于发送指示信息，接收单元用于在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收数据块。
作为一示例，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S；数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L；其中，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
作为又一示例，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：预定义的，或者，网络设备指示的。
作为又一示例，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的第一个时域符号。
又一种可能的实现方式，收发单元2710用于：发送指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收数据块，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L；其中，L表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S表示为数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
作为一示例，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限。
作为又一示例，第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，W个时域符号包括第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表 示第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；收发单元2710具体用于：在第一段连续时域符号上接收数据块和第一解调参考信号DMRS，在第二段连续时域符号上接收数据块和第二DMRS；其中，第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置和第二DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置，根据W确定；或者，第一DMRS在第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，第二DMRS在第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
作为又一示例，N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，第二时域单元为不接收数据块的时域单元，且在N个时域单元中的接收数据块的次数为(N-M)，M为大于1或等于1、且小于N的整数。
作为又一示例，收发单元2710还用于：在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收M次数据块。
作为又一示例，收发单元2710具体用于：在N个时域单元之后的M个时域单元上接收M次数据块，每个时域单元上接收一次数据块。
作为又一示例，收发单元2710具体用于：在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上的起始时域符号开始，按照每次重复接收数据块所占的时域符号数目为L，在连续的多个时域符号上进行重复接收数据块，直到数据块在N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收M次数据块所占的时域符号数为M*L。
又一种可能的实现方式，收发单元2710用于：发送指示信息，指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上发送一个数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收数据块，第一时域单元满足以下条件：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L’，且连续时域符号的起始位置不为S’；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L’，且大于或等于第三预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L’；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L’，且大于或等于第四预设门限；其中，L’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上的传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
示例地，收发单元2710可以包括接收单元和发送单元，发送单元用于发送指示信息，接收单元用于在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收数据块。
作为一示例，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S’；数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L’。
作为又一示例，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：预定义的，或者，网络设备指示的。
作为又一示例，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的第一个时域符号。
又一种可能的实现方式，收发单元2710用于：发送指示信息，指示信息用于指示在 N个时域单元上发送一个数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；在N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收数据块，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S’；或者，数据块在第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L’；其中，L’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S’表示为数据块在一个时域单元上的传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
作为一示例，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L’；或者，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L’，且大于或等于第三预设门限；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L’；或者，第一时域单元上用于传输数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，第一时域单元上可用于传输数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L’，且大于或等于第四预设门限。
该通信装置2700可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法实施例中的接收端设备(如网络设备)执行的步骤或者流程，该通信装置2700可以包括用于执行图9至图26中的接收端设备(如网络设备)执行的方法的单元。并且，该通信装置2700中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图9至图26中的方法实施例的相应流程。
其中，当该通信装置2700用于执行图9中的方法900时，收发单元2710可用于执行方法900中的步骤910和920，处理单元2720可用于执行方法900中的处理步骤。
当该通信装置2700用于执行图19中的方法1900时，收发单元2710可用于执行方法1900中的步骤1910和1920，处理单元2720可用于执行方法1900中的处理步骤。
当该通信装置2700用于执行图20中的方法2000时，收发单元2710可用于执行方法2000中的步骤2010和2040，处理单元2720可用于执行方法2000中的处理步骤。
当该通信装置2700用于执行图22中的方法2200时，收发单元2710可用于执行方法2200中的步骤2210、2220、2230，处理单元2720可用于执行方法2200中的处理步骤。
应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
上文实施例中的处理单元2720可以由至少一个处理器或处理器相关电路实现。收发单元2710可以由收发器或收发器相关电路实现。存储单元可以通过至少一个存储器实现。
如图28所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置2800。该通信装置2800包括处理器2810，处理器2810与存储器2820耦合，存储器2820用于存储计算机程序或指令和/或数据，处理器2810用于执行存储器2820存储的计算机程序或指令和/或数据，使得上文方法实施例中的方法被执行。
可选地，该通信装置2800包括的处理器2810为一个或多个。
可选地，如图28所示，该通信装置2800还可以包括存储器2820。
可选地，该通信装置2800包括的存储器2820可以为一个或多个。
可选地，该存储器2820可以与该处理器2810集成在一起，或者分离设置。
可选地，如图28所示，该通信装置2800还可以包括收发器2830，收发器2830用于信号的接收和/或发送。例如，处理器2810用于控制收发器2830进行信号的接收和/或发送。
作为一种方案，该通信装置2800用于实现上文方法实施例中由发送端设备(如终端设备)执行的操作。
例如，处理器2810用于实现上文方法实施例中由发送端设备(如终端设备)执行的处理相关的操作，收发器2830用于实现上文方法实施例中由发送端设备(如终端设备)执行的收发相关的操作。
作为另一种方案，该通信装置2800用于实现上文方法实施例中由接收端设备(如网络设备)执行的操作。
例如，处理器2810用于实现上文方法实施例中由接收端设备(如网络设备)执行的处理相关的操作，收发器2830用于实现上文方法实施例中由接收端设备(如网络设备)执行的收发相关的操作。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置2900，该通信装置2900可以是发送端设备(如终端设备)也可以是芯片。该通信装置2900可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由发送端设备(如终端设备)所执行的操作。
当该通信装置2900为终端设备时，图29示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。如图29所示，终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是，有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。
当需要发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明，图29中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器，在实际的终端设备产品中，可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置，也可以是与处理器集成在一起，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发单元，将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理单元。
如图29所示，终端设备包括收发单元2910和处理单元2920。收发单元2910也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元2920也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理模块、处理装置等。
可选地，可以将收发单元2910中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元2910中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元2910包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
例如，在一种实现方式中，处理单元2920用于执行方法900中的发送端设备侧的处 理动作。例如，处理单元2920用于执行方法900中的处理步骤，如判断时域单元是否符合条件；收发单元2910用于执行方法900中的收发操作，如步骤910和步骤920。
又如，在一种实现方式中，处理单元2920用于执行方法1900中的发送端设备侧的处理动作。例如，处理单元2920用于执行方法1900中的处理步骤，如判断用于补传数据块的时域单元；收发单元2910用于执行方法1900中的收发操作，如步骤1910和步骤1920。
又如，在一种实现方式中，处理单元2920用于执行方法2000中的发送端设备侧的处理动作。例如，处理单元2920用于执行方法2000中的处理步骤，如步骤2020和步骤2030；收发单元2910用于执行方法2000中的收发操作，如步骤2010和步骤2040。
又如，在一种实现方式中，处理单元2920用于执行方法2200中的发送端设备侧的处理动作。例如，处理单元2920用于执行方法2200中的处理步骤；收发单元2910用于执行方法2200中的收发操作，如步骤2210、步骤2220、步骤2230。
应理解，图29仅为示例而非限定，上述包括收发单元和处理单元的终端设备可以不依赖于图29所示的结构。
当该装置2900为芯片时，该芯片包括收发单元和处理单元。其中，收发单元可以是输入输出电路或通信接口；处理单元可以为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。当然装置2900为一个芯片系统或处理系统时，可使得安装该装置2900的设备可以实现本申请实施例的方法和功能。例如，处理单元2920可以为芯片系统或处理系统中的处理电路，实现对安装了该芯片系统或处理系统的设备的控制，还可以耦合连接存储单元，调用存储单元中的指令，使得设备可以实现本申请实施例的方法和功能，收发单元2910，可以为芯片系统或处理系统中的输入输出电路，将芯片系统处理好的信息输出，或将待处理的数据或信令信息输入芯片系统进行处理。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置3000，该通信装置3000可以是接收端设备(如网络设备)也可以是芯片。该通信装置3000可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由接收端设备(如网络设备)所执行的操作。
当该通信装置3000为网络设备时，例如为基站。图30示出了一种简化的基站结构示意图。基站包括3010部分以及3020部分。3010部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换；3020部分主要用于基带处理，对基站进行控制等。3010部分通常可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等。3020部分通常是基站的控制中心，通常可以称为处理单元，用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中接收端设备侧的处理操作。
3010部分的收发单元，也可以称为收发机或收发器等，其包括天线和射频电路，其中射频电路主要用于进行射频处理。可选地，可以将3010部分中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即3010部分包括接收单元和发送单元。接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等，发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
3020部分可以包括一个或多个单板，每个单板可以包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。处理器用于读取和执行存储器中的程序以实现基带处理功能以及对基站的控制。若存在多个单板，各个单板之间可以互联以增强处理能力。作为一种可选的实施方式，也可以是多个单板共用一个或多个处理器，或者是多个单板共用一个或多个存储器，或者 是多个单板同时共用一个或多个处理器。
例如，在一种实现方式中，3010部分的收发单元用于执行方法900中由网络设备执行的收发相关的步骤；3020部分用于执行方法900中由网络设备执行的处理相关的步骤。
又如，在一种实现方式中，3010部分的收发单元用于执行方法1900中由网络设备执行的收发相关的步骤；3020部分用于执行方法1900中由网络设备执行的处理相关的步骤。
又如，在一种实现方式中，3010部分的收发单元用于执行方法2000中由网络设备执行的收发相关的步骤；3020部分用于执行方法2000中由网络设备执行的处理相关的步骤。
又如，在一种实现方式中，3010部分的收发单元用于执行方法2200中由网络设备执行的收发相关的步骤；3020部分用于执行方法2200中由网络设备执行的处理相关的步骤。
应理解，图30仅为示例而非限定，上述包括收发单元和处理单元的网络设备可以不依赖于图30所示的结构。
当该装置3000为芯片时，该芯片包括收发单元和处理单元。其中，收发单元可以是输入输出电路、通信接口；处理单元为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。当然装置3000还可以为一个芯片系统或处理系统，使得安装该装置3000的设备可以实现本申请实施例的方法和功能。例如，处理单元3020可以为芯片系统或处理系统中的处理电路，实现对安装了该芯片系统或处理系统的设备的控制，还可以耦合链接存储单元，调用存储单元中的指令，使得设备可以实现本申请实施例的方法和功能，收发单元3010，可以为芯片系统或处理系统中的输入输出电路，将芯片系统处理好的信息输出，或将待处理的数据或信令信息输入芯片系统进行处理。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有用于实现上述方法实施例中由发送端设备(如终端设备)执行的方法，或由接收端设备(如网络设备)执行的方法的计算机指令。
例如，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，使得该计算机可以实现上述方法实施例中由终端设备执行的方法，或由网络设备执行的方法。
本申请实施例还提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，该指令被计算机执行时使得该计算机实现上述方法实施例中由发送端设备(如终端设备)执行的方法，或由接收端设备(如网络设备)执行的方法。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统，该通信系统包括上文实施例中的发送端设备和接收端设备，如终端设备和网络设备。
上述提供的任一种装置中相关内容的解释及有益效果均可参考上文提供的对应的方法实施例，此处不再赘述。
应理解，本申请实施例中提及的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
还应理解，本申请实施例中提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only  memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)。例如，RAM可以用作外部高速缓存。作为示例而非限定，RAM可以包括如下多种形式：静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
需要说明的是，当处理器为通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件时，存储器(存储模块)可以集成在处理器中。
还需要说明的是，本文描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的保护范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述方便和简洁，上述描述的装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。此外，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元实现本申请提供的方案。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。例如，所述计算机可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站 站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk，(SSD))等。例如，前述的可用介质可以包括但不限于：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到的变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以权利要求和说明书的保护范围为准。

Claims (51)

  1. 一种发送数据的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；
    在所述N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送所述数据块，其中，所述第一时域单元满足以下条件：
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L，且连续时域符号的起始位置不为S，S表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限；
    其中，L表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：预定义的，或者，网络设备指示的。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的第一个时域符号。
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    对所述数据块进行信道编码，得到编码后的比特序列；
    从所述编码后的比特序列中，选择第一比特序列，所述第一比特序列对应所述L个时域符号；
    所述在所述第一时域单元上发送所述数据块，包括：
    在所述第一时域单元上发送第二比特序列，所述第二比特序列在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续，
    其中，所述第二比特序列为所述第一比特序列中的部分比特序列。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一时域单元上发送所述第二比特序列之前，所述方法还包括：
    将所述第一比特序列中，映射于第一时域符号上的比特序列删除，得到所述第二比特序列，所述第一时域符号为所述第一时域单元上不能用于传输所述数据块的时域符号。
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，所述W个时域符号包括第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，所述第一段连续时域符号和所述第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示所述第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传 输所述数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；
    所述在第一时域单元上发送所述数据块，包括：
    在所述第一段连续时域符号上发送所述数据块和第一解调参考信号DMRS，在所述第二段连续时域符号上发送所述数据块和第二DMRS；
    其中，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置和所述第二DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置，根据所述W确定；或者，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，所述第二DMRS在所述第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
  7. 根据权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，所述第二时域单元为不发送所述数据块的时域单元，且所述数据块在所述N个时域单元中的发送次数为(N-M)，M为大于1或等于1、且小于N的整数；
    所述方法还包括：
    在所述N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次所述数据块。
  8. 一种发送数据的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；
    在所述N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送所述数据块，所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：
    所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，
    所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S；或者，
    所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L；
    其中，L表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    在所述第一时域单元满足以下条件的情况下，确定在所述第一时域单元上发送所述数据块：
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限。
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    对所述数据块进行信道编码，得到编码后的比特序列；
    从所述编码后的比特序列中，选择第一比特序列，所述第一比特序列对应所述L个时域符号；
    所述在所述第一时域单元上发送所述数据块，包括：
    在所述第一时域单元上发送第二比特序列，所述第二比特序列在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续，
    其中，所述第二比特序列为所述第一比特序列中的部分比特序列。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一时域单元上发送所述第二比特序列之前，所述方法还包括：
    将所述第一比特序列中，映射于第一时域符号上的比特序列删除，得到所述第二比特序列，所述第一时域符号为所述第一时域单元上不能用于传输所述数据块的时域符号。
  12. 根据权利要求8至11中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，所述W个时域符号包括第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，所述第一段连续时域符号和所述第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示所述第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；
    所述在第一时域单元上发送所述数据块，包括：
    在所述第一段连续时域符号上发送所述数据块和第一解调参考信号DMRS，在所述第二段连续时域符号上发送所述数据块和第二DMRS；
    其中，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置和所述第二DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置，根据所述W确定；或者，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，所述第二DMRS在所述第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
  13. 根据权利要求8至12中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，所述第二时域单元为不发送所述数据块的时域单元，且所述数据块在所述N个时域单元中的发送次数为(N-M)，M为大于1或等于1、且小于N的整数，
    所述方法还包括：
    在所述N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次所述数据块。
  14. 一种接收数据的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；
    在所述N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收所述数据块，所述第一时域单元满足以下条件：
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L，且连续时域符号的起始位置不为S，S表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限；
    其中，L表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的第一个时域符号。
  16. 根据权利要求14或15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：预定义的，或者，网络设备指示的。
  17. 根据权利要求14至16中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，所述W个时域符号包括第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，所述第一段连续时域符号和所述第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示所述第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；
    所述在第一时域单元上接收所述数据块，包括：
    在所述第一段连续时域符号上接收所述数据块和第一解调参考信号DMRS，在所述第二段连续时域符号上接收所述数据块和第二DMRS；
    其中，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置和所述第二DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置，根据所述W确定；或者，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，所述第二DMRS在所述第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
  18. 根据权利要求14至17中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，所述第二时域单元为不接收所述数据块的时域单元，且在所述N个时域单元中的接收所述数据块的次数为(N-M)，M为大于1或等于1、且小于N的整数；
    所述方法还包括：
    在所述N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收M次所述数据块。
  19. 一种接收数据的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；
    在所述N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收所述数据块，所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上传输时包括以下一项或多项：
    所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，
    所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S；或者，
    所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L；
    其中，L表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限。
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，所述W个时域符号包括第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，所述第一段连续时域符号和所述第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示所述第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；
    所述在第一时域单元上接收所述数据块，包括：
    在所述第一段连续时域符号上接收所述数据块和第一解调参考信号DMRS，在所述第二段连续时域符号上接收所述数据块和第二DMRS；
    其中，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置和所述第二DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置，根据所述W确定；或者，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，所述第二DMRS在所述第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
  22. 根据权利要求19至21中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，所述第二时域单元为不接收所述数据块的时域单元，且在所述N个时域单元中的接收所述数据块的次数为(N-M)，M为大于1或等于1、且小于N的整数；
    所述方法还包括：
    在所述N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收M次所述数据块。
  23. 一种发送数据的装置，其特征在于，包括：接收单元和发送单元，
    所述接收单元，用于接收指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；
    所述发送单元，用于在所述N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送所述数据块，其中，所述第一时域单元满足以下条件：
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L，且连续时域符号的起始位置不为S，S表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限；
    其中，L表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的装置，其特征在于，所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：预定义的，或者，网络设备指示的。
  25. 根据权利要求23或24所述的装置，其特征在于，所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的第一个时域符号。
  26. 根据权利要求23至25中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括处理单元，
    所述处理单元，用于对所述数据块进行信道编码，得到编码后的比特序列；
    所述处理单元，还用于从所述编码后的比特序列中，选择第一比特序列，所述第一比特序列对应L个时域符号；
    所述发送单元，具体用于：在所述第一时域单元上发送第二比特序列，所述第二比特序列在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续，
    其中，所述第二比特序列为所述第一比特序列中的部分比特序列。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，还用于：
    将所述第一比特序列中，映射于第一时域符号上的比特序列删除，得到所述第二比特序列，所述第一时域符号为所述第一时域单元上不能用于传输所述数据块的时域符号。
  28. 根据权利要求23至27中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，所述W个时域符号包括第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，所述第一段连续时域符号和所述第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示所述第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；
    所述发送单元，具体用于：
    在所述第一段连续时域符号上发送所述数据块和第一解调参考信号DMRS，在所述第二段连续时域符号上发送所述数据块和第二DMRS；
    其中，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置和所述第二DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置，根据所述W确定；或者，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，所述第二DMRS在所述第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
  29. 根据权利要求23至28中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，所述第二时域单元为不发送所述数据块的时域单元，且所述数据块在所述N个时域单元中的发送次数为(N-M)，M为大于1或等于1、且小于N的整数，
    所述发送单元，还用于，在所述N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次所述数据块。
  30. 一种发送数据的装置，其特征在于，包括：接收单元和发送单元，
    所述接收单元，用于接收指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；
    所述发送单元，用于在所述N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上发送所述数据块，所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号包括以下一项或多项：
    所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，
    所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S；或者，
    所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L；
    其中，L表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括处理单元，
    所述处理单元，用于确定所述第一时域单元满足以下条件：
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限。
  32. 根据权利要求30或31所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括处理单元，
    所述处理单元，用于对所述数据块进行信道编码，得到编码后的比特序列；
    所述处理单元，还用于从所述编码后的比特序列中，选择第一比特序列，所述第一比特序列对应L个时域符号；
    所述发送单元，具体用于：在所述第一时域单元上发送第二比特序列，所述第二比特序列在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续，
    其中，所述第二比特序列为所述第一比特序列中的部分比特序列。
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，还用于：
    将所述第一比特序列中，映射于第一时域符号上的比特序列删除，得到所述第二比特序列，所述第一时域符号为所述第一时域单元上不能用于传输所述数据块的时域符号。
  34. 根据权利要求30至33中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，所述W个时域符号包括第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，所述第一段连续时域符号和所述第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示所述第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；
    所述发送单元，具体用于：
    在所述第一段连续时域符号上发送所述数据块和第一解调参考信号DMRS，在所述第二段连续时域符号上发送所述数据块和第二DMRS；
    其中，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置和所述第二DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置，根据所述W确定；或者，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，所述第二DMRS在所述第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
  35. 根据权利要求30至34中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，所述第二时域单元为不发送所述数据块的时域单元，且所述数据块在所述N个时域单元中的发送次数为(N-M)，M为大于1或等于1、且小于N的整数，
    所述发送单元，还用于，在所述N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上发送M次所述数据块。
  36. 一种接收数据的装置，其特征在于，包括：接收单元和发送单元，
    所述发送单元，用于发送指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于1或等于1的整数；
    所述接收单元，用于在所述N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收所述数据块，所述第一时域单元满足以下条件：
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L，且连续时域符号的起始位置不为S，S表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限；
    其中，L表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目。
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的装置，其特征在于，所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的第一个时域符号。
  38. 根据权利要求36或37所述的装置，其特征在于，所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置为：预定义的，或者，网络设备指示的。
  39. 根据权利要求36至38中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，所述W个时域符号包括第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，所述第一段连续时域符号和所述第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示所述第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；
    所述接收单元，具体用于：
    在所述第一段连续时域符号上接收所述数据块和第一解调参考信号DMRS，在所述第二段连续时域符号上接收所述数据块和第二DMRS；
    其中，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置和所述第二DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置，根据所述W确定；或者，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，所述第二DMRS在所述第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
  40. 根据权利要求36至39中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，所述第二时域单元为不接收所述数据块的时域单元，且在所述N个时域单元中的接收所述数据块的次数为(N-M)，M为大于1或等于1、且小于N的整数，
    所述接收单元，还用于在所述N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收M次所 述数据块。
  41. 一种接收数据的装置，其特征在于，包括：接收单元和发送单元，
    所述发送单元，用于发送指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示在N个时域单元上重复发送N次同一数据块，N为大于或等于1的整数；
    所述接收单元，用于在所述N个时域单元中的第一时域单元上接收所述数据块，所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上传输时包括以下一项或多项：
    所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号不连续；或者，
    所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的起始时域符号的位置不等于S；或者，
    所述数据块在所述第一时域单元上所占的时域符号的数目不等于L；
    其中，L表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的时域符号的数目，S表示为所述数据块的一次传输所配置的起始时域符号的位置。
  42. 根据权利要求41所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目大于或等于L；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的连续时域符号的数目小于L，且大于或等于第一预设门限；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目大于或等于L；或者，
    所述第一时域单元上用于传输所述数据块的时域符号不连续的情况下，所述第一时域单元上可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号的总数目小于L，且大于或等于第二预设门限。
  43. 根据权利要求41或42所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一时域单元包括W个时域符号，所述W个时域符号包括第一段连续时域符号和第二段连续时域符号，所述第一段连续时域符号和所述第二段连续时域符号不连续，W表示所述第一时域单元上第一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号到最后一个可用于传输所述数据块的时域符号所包含的时域符号的数目；
    所述接收单元，具体用于：
    在所述第一段连续时域符号上接收所述数据块和第一解调参考信号DMRS，在所述第二段连续时域符号上接收所述数据块和第二DMRS；
    其中，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置和所述第二DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置，根据所述W确定；或者，所述第一DMRS在所述第一段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第一段连续时域符号的数目确定，所述第二DMRS在所述第二段连续时域符号上的位置根据所述第二段连续时域符号的数目确定。
  44. 根据权利要求41至43中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述N个时域单元包括M个第二时域单元，所述第二时域单元为不接收所述数据块的时域单元，且在所述N个时域单元中的接收所述数据块的次数为(N-M)，M为大于1或等于1、且小于N的整数，
    所述接收单元，还用于在所述N个时域单元之后的至少一个时域单元上接收M次所述数据块。
  45. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括至少一个处理器，所述至少一个处理器用于执 行如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法，或者，所述至少一个处理器用于执行如权利要求14至22中任一项所述的方法。
  46. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括至少一个处理器，所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法，或者，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求14至22中任一项所述的方法。
  47. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括：
    通信接口，用于输入和/或输出信息；
    处理器，用于执行计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法，或者，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求14至22中任一项所述的方法。
  48. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储计算机程序；
    处理器，用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法，或者，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求14至22中任一项所述的方法。
  49. 一种芯片，其特征在于，包括：处理器和接口，用于从存储器中调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序，执行如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法，或者，执行如权利要求14至22中任一项所述的方法。
  50. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法，或者，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求14至22中任一项所述的方法。
  51. 一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法，或者，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求14至22中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2021/072274 2020-12-22 2021-01-15 发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置 WO2022134247A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202180079413.1A CN116491194A (zh) 2020-12-22 2021-01-15 发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CNPCT/CN2020/138424 2020-12-22
PCT/CN2020/138424 WO2022133754A1 (zh) 2020-12-22 2020-12-22 发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022134247A1 true WO2022134247A1 (zh) 2022-06-30

Family

ID=82157048

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/138424 WO2022133754A1 (zh) 2020-12-22 2020-12-22 发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置
PCT/CN2021/072274 WO2022134247A1 (zh) 2020-12-22 2021-01-15 发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/138424 WO2022133754A1 (zh) 2020-12-22 2020-12-22 发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116491194A (zh)
WO (2) WO2022133754A1 (zh)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111757493A (zh) * 2019-03-29 2020-10-09 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种信息发送方法及装置
TW202041075A (zh) * 2019-02-15 2020-11-01 美商高通公司 跨時槽邊界之實體上行鏈路之共享頻道重覆

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110035529B (zh) * 2018-01-12 2021-07-16 华为技术有限公司 一种资源配置的方法和通信装置
CN110392433B (zh) * 2018-04-20 2022-04-19 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种数据传输方法及装置
CN110913481B (zh) * 2018-09-17 2023-02-10 华为技术有限公司 数据传输方法及通信装置
CN111182634B (zh) * 2018-11-22 2021-09-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 数据传输方法、终端及网络设备
CN110460419B (zh) * 2019-08-09 2022-05-31 北京紫光展锐通信技术有限公司 上行数据发送方法及装置、存储介质、终端、基站

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TW202041075A (zh) * 2019-02-15 2020-11-01 美商高通公司 跨時槽邊界之實體上行鏈路之共享頻道重覆
CN111757493A (zh) * 2019-03-29 2020-10-09 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种信息发送方法及装置

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
MODERATOR (APPLE INC.): "Final Summary of [101-e-NR-L1enh-URLLC-PUSCH-02] (AI 7.2.5.3)", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2004740, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20200525 - 20200605, 8 June 2020 (2020-06-08), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051894332 *
QUALCOMM INCORPORATED: "PUSCH Enhancements for eURLLC", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1903006 PUSCH ENHANCEMENTS FOR EURLLC, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Athens, Greece; 20190225 - 20190301, 16 February 2019 (2019-02-16), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051600703 *
SHARP: "Views on potential enhancements to PUSCH for eURLLC", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1902664, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Athens, Greece; 20190225 - 20190301, 15 February 2019 (2019-02-15), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051600359 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116491194A (zh) 2023-07-25
WO2022133754A1 (zh) 2022-06-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020143752A1 (zh) 信息传输的方法和通信装置
CN106471765B (zh) 利用改进的harq反馈指示的无线通信方法和系统
US11647503B2 (en) Information transmission method, terminal device, and network device
KR101274663B1 (ko) 일반 및 가상 듀얼 계층 ａｃｋ/ｎａｃｋ 사이의 선택
JP7082971B2 (ja) 端末及び通信方法
US20200396115A1 (en) Wireless communication transceiver and wireless communication method
KR102374244B1 (ko) 업링크 제어 채널을 전송하기 위한 방법 및 장치
WO2019137467A1 (zh) 上行信息传输方法及装置
JP7451826B2 (ja) アップリンク送信のための方法及び装置
WO2018171625A1 (zh) 数据发送的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2019158042A1 (zh) 通信的方法和装置
US20230139754A1 (en) Coding method and apparatus
EP3703438A1 (en) Uplink control channel transmission method, terminal device and network device
WO2020199767A1 (zh) 通信方法、通信装置和系统
CN107667483A (zh) 具有对csi‑rs产生的干扰的预测的外环链路适配
WO2023008014A1 (en) Signaling and configurations of sr multiplexing on pusch
WO2022134247A1 (zh) 发送数据和接收数据的方法以及通信装置
WO2022126648A1 (zh) 一种信息传输方法及其装置
US11108527B2 (en) CQI codepoint reinterpretation
WO2020156002A1 (zh) 通信方法及通信装置
WO2022237675A1 (zh) 信息发送的方法和装置
WO2022022730A1 (zh) 重复传输的方法、装置
CN114070462B (zh) 重复传输的方法、装置
WO2022206579A1 (zh) 一种上行控制信息传输方法和装置
WO2023008017A1 (en) METHODS OF JOINT REPORTING OF HARQ-ACK and HIGH PRIORITY SR ON A LOW PRIORITY PUSCH

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21908266

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202180079413.1

Country of ref document: CN

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21908266

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1